Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
E D I T E D AND TRANSLATED
BY
JOHN MACDONALD
VOLUME I: T H E T E X T
1963
V E R L A G A L F R E D T O P E L M A N N • B E R L I N
B E I H E F T E ZUR Z E I T S C H R I F T Ft)R DIE
ALTTESTAMENTLICHE WISSENSCHAFT
H E R A U S G E G E B E N VON GEORG FOHRER
84
©
1963
by Alfred Topelmann, Berlin 30, Genthiner StraBe 13
Printed in Germany
Archiv-Nr. 38 22 633 I
ZUR EINFUHRUNG
Von P a u l K a h l e
I m S o m m e r 1 9 0 6 , als ich deutscher Pfarrer in K a i r o w a r , habe ich
mich zum erstenmal fur drei T a g e in N a b l u s aufgehalten u n d dabei die
Abschriften des T a r g u m t e x t e s der T o r a F i n h a s i j e u n d des aramaischen
T e x t e s v o n M e m a r M a r q a h nach einer den Priestern gehorigen H a n d -
schrift in A u f t r a g gegeben. W a h r e n d eines I4ta.gigen B e s u c h e s in
Nablus im J u l i 1 9 0 8 habe ich die bestellten Abschriften m i t den Ori-
ginalen verglichen u n d einen v o n drei T e x t e n des M e m a r M a r q a h , die
derselbe Abschreiber hergestellt hatte, fur die Berliner Staatsbibliothek
erworben. D e n n diese besaB z w a r eine v o n P e t e r m a n n besorgte u n d
viel benutzte Abschrift des T e x t e s , die aber nicht sehr zuverlassig zu
sein schien. A l s ich im Begriff w a r , N a b l u s zu verlassen, bot mir ein
Samaritaner eine fragmentarische Handschrift v o n M e m a r M a r q a h
zum K a u f e an, die zweifellos alter als die bisher gesehenen H a n d -
schriften w a r . J e d o c h konnten w i r uns iiber den Preis nicht einigen.
N a c h d e m ich im Herbst 1 9 0 9 als Mitarbeiter a n dem v o n Gustaf
D a l m a n geleiteten Deutschen E v a n g e l i s c h e n Institut fur A l t e r t u m s -
wissenschaft des Heiligen L a n d e s nach J e r u s a l e m gekommen w a r , er-
schienen im N o v e m b e r jenes J a h r e s v i e r samaritanische Priester aus
N a b l u s mit der mir im J a h r e z u v o r angebotenen Handschrift des
Memar Marqah u n d erklarten: « D u wolltest die Handschrift j a kaufen,
so haben w i r sie dir mitgebracht.» Diesmal kaufte ich sie ihnen a b . S o
ist die Handschrift in meinen B e s i t z gelangt.
A l s dann D r . B o w m a n in L e e d s seine Studien a n samaritanischen
T e x t e n begann u n d mich fragte, ob er meine Handschrift des M e m a r
M a r q a h mitverwerten konne, stellte ich sie i h m zur Verfiigung. A l s er
die L e i t u n g des D e p a r t m e n t of Semitic L a n g u a g e s der Melbourne U n i
versity iibernahm, erklarte er mir, er habe die Handschrift D r . M a c -
donald iibergeben, der sie bearbeiten wolle. I c h konnte mich b a l d bei
einer Besprechung in L e e d s u n d einer weiteren in Oxford d a v o n iiber-
zeugen, daB B o w m a n die richtige W a h l getroffen h a t t e . I c h h a b e
seither die Bearbeitung dieses W e r k e s mitverfolgen konnen.
D r . Macdonald charakterisiert d a s W e r k des M a r q a h g a n z zutreffend
als die wichtigste samaritanische Schrift nach dem Samaritanischen
Pentateuch u n d dem T a r g u m . Sie ist ein representatives W e r k aus den
ersten J a h r h u n d e r t e n n. C h r . u n d die alteste literarische S c h o p f u n g
der Samaritaner, die innerhalb v o n 1 - 2 J a h r h u n d e r t e n nach ihrer A b -
fassung datiert werden kann. W i r finden in diesem groBen W e r k e
Marqah's die ersten Spuren eines hochst beachtenswerten P h a n o m e n s
VI Einfuhrung
U n i v e r s i t y of L e e d s , JOHN MACDONALD
D e p a r t m e n t of S e m i t i c
Languages and Literatures
LIST OF CONTENTS
Abbreviations XI
INTRODUCTION
3 . T h e present edition
The Kahle M S (K) XXVI
T h e Danafi M S S (D) XXIX
T h e L e v i t i c a l M S S (L) XXXI
British M u s e u m H a r l . C o d e x . 5 5 1 4 (H) a n d B r i t i s h M u s e u m
(Gaster Collection) 8 8 3 (F) XXXII
Concluding observations on M S S relationships XXXIII
Modus operandi of the T e x t E d i t i o n XXXIII
5 . T h e A r a b i c translations XXXVI
6. T h e E n g l i s h translation XXXVII
PART I: T H E T E X T
Book I 3
Book I I 29
Book I I I 53
Book I V 81
Book V 115
Book V I 129
X L i s t of Contents
APPENDICES
A A
A r a b i c version: e.g. D . i = A r a b i c version of D . i
Acc. Accadian
add. add, adds, adding, addition
Aph. Aph'el
Aram. Aramaic
out sim. or similar
A.V. A u t h o r i z e d Version
Bibl. Biblical
Bk. Book
C. C o w l e y A . E . The Samaritan Liturgy, 2 vols., Oxford, 1 9 0 9 .
cf. compare
D Danafi M S S
E E l o h i s t source (of Pentateuch)
Ed. E d i t i o n , edited b y
Ethpa. Ethpa'al
et seq. a n d the following as well
F F r a g m e n t M S (British Museum)
f. folio, folios
ff. followed b y , following
fig. figurative
H Harleian M S
Heb. Hebrew
ibid. the same reference
i.e. t h a t is
imper. imperative
Ithpa. Ithpa'el
Ithpe. Ithpe'al
J J e h o v i s t ( Y a h w i s t ) source (of Pentateuch)
Jew. J e w i s h (especially in J e w . T a r g . = J e w i s h T a r g u m s in
general)
Jon. Jonathan
K Kahle M S
L Levitical M S S
1. read, reads, reading
Lam. Lamedh
lit. literally
LXX Septuagint
marg. margin, m a r g i n a l
masc. masculine
XII Abbreviations
Is. Isaiah
Matt. Matthew
Cor. Corinthians
Eph. Ephesians
Heb. Hebrews
Jas. James
Rev. Revelation
( A p o c r y p h a ) Mace. Maccabees
INTRODUCTION
i. M E M A R MARQAH
II
XVIII Introduction
7
So D. Rettig's title Memar Marqah: Ein samaritanischer Midrasch zum Pentateuch unter-
sucht, Bonn, 1934. So also Heidenheim's Der Kommentar Marqas, des Samaritaners,
Weimar, 1896.
8
J . E . H. Thomson: The Samaritans: Their Testimony to the Religion of Israel, Edin
burgh, 1919, p. 268. M. Gaster: The Asatir: The Samaritan Book of the Secrets of
Moses, London, 1927, p. 134.
8
See M. Gaster: "The Samaritan Legends of the Birth of Moses" in The Quest, X X I . 1,
London, 1930. J . Macdonald: "The Samaritan Doctrine of Moses" in Scottish Journal
of Theology, Vol. 1 3 , no. 2, June, i960, pp. 149-62.
Memar Marqah XIX
II*
T H E DATE OF T H E MEMAR
M a r q a h w a s the son of A m r a m b. Sered according to the S a m a r i t a n
13
c h r o n i c l e s . I t is not k n o w n for certain w h e t h e r he w a s a High Priest
1 4
as the 1 3 t h or 1 4 t h c e n t u r y V a t i c a n M S a n d later liturgical M S S
s t a t e ; it is more likely t h a t the ascription of t h a t M S and others really
refers to the 1 3 t h c e n t u r y A m r a m , H i g h Priest. H o w e v e r , there is no
doubt t h a t the S a m a r i t a n s themselves for centuries h a v e regarded
M a r q a h as a m a n of the greatest possible distinction, w h o m t h e y re
v e r e d as t h e y revered no other outside of their Bible. F r o m the
1 4 t h c e n t u r y on liturgical compositions w e r e often modelled on M a r
qah's style.
1 5
H i s son N a n a h appears in the Defter as the composer of a h y m n .
1 6
I t h a s been observed b y C o w l e y t h a t M a r q a h ( = Marcus) w a s also
called nwo ( = T i t u s ) a n d his son's n a m e m a y = Nonus, so that the
f a m i l y of A m r a m b . Sered "must h a v e lived in the time of the R o m a n
government of S y r i a " ( S y r i a = Palestine, L e b a n o n , S y r i a of t o d a y ) .
A s far as dating the M e m a r is concerned therefore, w e h a v e several
factors t h a t indicate the 2 n d ~ 4 t h centuries A . D . — T h e use of Greek
w o r d s , the A r a m a i z e d R o m a n names of Marqah's family, the ideolo
gical outlook, the midrashic material, the philosophical and scientific
passages, the language a n d style, and, as w e shall see below, the long
t e x t u a l tradition. A l l this is in addition to the inescapable fact that
M a r q a h does not b e t r a y a n y definite signs of the I s l a m i c influences so
prominent in later S a m a r i t a n i s m . T h e S a m a r i t a n chronicles them
17
s e l v e s , especially from the n t h century, place M a r q a h and N a n a h
a t about t h a t time. I n addition there is the fact t h a t of all the hundreds
of S a m a r i t a n f a m i l y names k n o w n to us, only M a r q a h , N a n a h and
T o t a are R o m a n .
P e r h a p s in the future it will b e possible to trace the history of Chris
t i a n i t y in S a m a r i a more e x a c t l y , so t h a t w e m a y discover w h y M a r q a h
shows some knowledge of S t . J o h n ' s Gospel, w h i l e later writers use it
in such a w a y as to p r o v e actual dependence, a t times verbatim, on it.
THE TEXT
W e n o w turn to the history of the t e x t in general terms before ex
amining the available M S S in chapter 3 of this Introduction. T h e
oldest t e x t announced belongs to the late 1 4 t h century, the n e x t oldest
to over a c e n t u r y later, followed b y t w o of nearly t w o centuries later
still, a n d a few modern M S S .
1 3
e.g. Abu '1-Fath: at-Taulida, p. 133, Neubauer's edition in Journal Asiatique, De
cember 1869.
1 1 1 5
Vatican Sam. MS. 3; Cowley, op. cit. I. 31.
16
op. cit. I. xxi. n. 1.
1 7
See Cowley, op. cit. I. xx & xxiv.
Memar Marqah XXI
2. P R E V I O U S R E S E A R C H and P U B L I C A T I O N S
2 1
e.g. British Museum Harl. Cod. 5514.
2 2
Leipzig, 1824.
2 3
"From a Passover Haggada of the Samaritans" in Zur Sprache, Literatur und Dog-
matik der Samaritaner, Leipzig, 1876.
2 1
(den Grundstock der hebraischen Sprache) ankniipfende Abhandlung, Berlin, 1888.
P r e v i o u s research a n d publications XXIII
5
under the title Der Kommentar Marqas, des Samaritaners? A year
later in 1 8 9 7 L . E m m r i c h produced a t e x t of a small p a r t of B o o k I I
under the title Das Siegeslied {Exodus cap. 15): eine Schrifterkldrung
des Samaritaners Marqah in B e r l i n .
I n the following y e a r , M . Hildesheimer edited p a r t of B o o k I under
the title Des Samaritaners Marqah Buch der Wunder in Berlin. F i n a l l y
in 1 9 3 4 in B o n n D . R e t t i g edited p a r t of B o o k I V under the title
Memar Marqah: ein Samaritanischer Midrasch zum Pentateuch in t h e
Bonner Orientalische Studien Series.
Some of M a r q a h ' s H y m n s from the Defter w e r e also reproduced or
edited after the time of Gesenius, e.g. b y R . K i r c h h e i m in Carme
Shomron, F r a n k f u r t a / M . in 1 8 5 1 , b u t the only critical edition of v a l u e
has been t h a t of Professor P . K a h l e , "Die zwolf M a r k a - H y m n e n aus
26
dem "Defter" der samaritanischen L i t u r g i e . "
K o h n ' s w o r k w a s of little v a l u e a p a r t from the fact t h a t it did repre
sent p a r t of the Memar, because it w a s based on a single fragment
whose t e x t is inferior a n d unreceived. T h e w o r k of P e t e r m a n n h a d
value because it w a s the first complete t e x t , b u t again only one (in
ferior) M S underlay it, a n d the w h o l e production w a s uncritical.
Similarly, the w o r k of B a n e t h , M u n k a n d E m m r i c h relied on a single
complete text. H o w e v e r , B a n e t h , M u n k a n d E m m r i c h contributed for
the first time useful critical a n d c o m p a r a t i v e observations, especially
on linguistic matters, and attention w a s d r a w n to possible comparison
of S a m a r i t a n traditions w i t h J e w i s h sources.
Heidenheim u n h a p p i l y reproduced his t e x t inaccurately a n d errors
exist b y the score. H e attempted to g i v e the B i b l i c a l references (as
footnotes to the t e x t ) , b u t this w a s an incomplete a n d a r b i t r a r y a t
tempt. Furthermore he m a d e use of a fragment of the Memar dis
covered in the British Museum (see c h a p t e r 3 below under H ) , b u t this
fragment w a s too small to be of real v a l u e a t t h a t time. Most of his
footnotes, apart from the B i b l i c a l references, consist of his o w n emen
dations and readings, almost all of w h i c h h a v e since p r o v e d to be wrong.
Y e t Heidenheim performed a useful service. H e recognized t h a t
K o h n ' s fragment represented p a r t of the Memar a n d t h a t the B r i t i s h
Museum fragment and the fragment published b y K o h n d e v i a t e d from
the Berlin Codex. T h u s a beginning w a s m a d e to the critical, c o m p a r a
tive work n o w possible in this complete edition. I t h a s rarely been
pointed out, if ever, t h a t B o o k I I I is missing from Heidenheim's t e x t .
U p to the beginning of the 2 0 t h c e n t u r y , therefore, the t e x t of
Memar Marqah w a s k n o w n only from one poor complete M S a n d t w o
fragments.
2 5
Bibliotheca Samaritana III, Weimar.
2 6
In Baumstark-Festschrift, Oriens Christianus III, 7, 1932, pp. 77-106, and later in
Opera Minora (P. Kahle), 1956.
XXIV Introduction
3. T H E P R E S E N T E D I T I O N
T H E K A H L E M S (K)
3 2
P h i n e h a s became H i g h Priest in 7 9 3 A . H . Since his father I t h a m a r
only is entitled H i g h Priest in the Colophon, K m u s t h a v e been written
for P h i n e h a s before 7 9 3 a n d thus K m a y be dated about 7 9 0 A . H .
2 . K e v e r y w h e r e throughout B o o k s I to V reveals an approximation
of the Danafi a n d L e v i t i c a l versions—with the exception to a degree
of the early p a r t of B o o k I , a n d it is precisely here t h a t one m i g h t
e x p e c t a priest's or scribe's m e m o r y to be fairly a c c u r a t e ! T h e further
one reads the more K deviates from w h a t m a y be regarded as the
established t e x t . T h i s is not to s a y t h a t K is of little value, however,
for there is no ground for asserting t h a t P h i n e h a s did not recollect
e x a c t forms a n d phrases. T h e r e are places, even t o w a r d s the end of
B o o k I , w h e r e K clearly offers a better form, b u t on the whole this
is rare.
T h i s M S is inconsistent in its H e b r a i s m s , in its use of matres lectionis,
and sometimes a verse is given t w i c e w h e r e each is a v a r i a n t form of
the other. R e t t i g h a s perhaps failed to realize the extent of K ' s in
consistent orthography. If h e h a d felt obliged to present a standard
ization of the o r t h o g r a p h y (within permissible limits, of course), he
w o u l d h a v e observed t h a t K is one of the least consistent of the M S S
in o r t h o g r a p h y , in Hebraizing forms a n d in its use of s y n o n y m s . See
further A p p e n d i x I I for e x a m p l e s of K ' s inaccurate a n d inconsistent
orthography.
3 . K is not only a n a p p r o x i m a t e t e x t ; it is an a p p r o x i m a t e Danafi-
t y p e t e x t . T h e only M S consulted t h a t agrees closely w i t h K , where K
diverges w i d e l y from the Danafi a n d L e v i t i c a l M S S is a Danafi M S
(see under D . 3 below). T h i s close relationship is seen most clearly in K ,
f. I 3 - I 3 a , a n d D . 3 , f. 5 5 - 5 6 . K throughout is undoubtedly closer to
the Danafi t e x t t h a n to the L e v i t i c a l .
4. K presents a smooth, easily readable t e x t . " M e m o r y smooths
a w a y difficulties." A s a general rule in dealing w i t h old M S S , the per
sistence of difficulties of s y n t a x a n d mutilation of unusual words in
dicates t h a t such a t e x t h a s p r o b a b l y a long history. K is singularly
free of s y n t a c t i c a l difficulties, a f a c t w h i c h , a t least as a part of cumu
l a t i v e evidence, suggests an a p p r o x i m a t e t e x t dictated from m e m o r y
a n d not copied.
5 . I t seems almost certain t h a t K w a s s o m e w h a t longer than the
Danafi a n d L e v i t i c a l t e x t s , b u t it p r o b a b l y covered the same ground
b y a n d large. T h e r e are fewer Danafi a n d L e v i t i c a l pieces missing in K
t h a n there are K additions missing in the other t w o . T h e difference in
length between the t e x t of K a n d t h a t of the other M S S m a y well
suggest a p a r a p h r a s t i c or pleonastic t e x t not derived directly from an
anterior t e x t .
8 2
See also Jewish Quarterly Review, xv. p. 636, quoted by Cowley, op. cit., II. p. xxix.
T h e present edition XXIX
T h e o r t h o g r a p h y of K
T h e chief orthographic characteristics of K a r e a s follows:
1 . Use of Hebrew forms. H o p h ' a l forms are more c o m m o n in K t h a n
in a n y other M S . I t is n o t e w o r t h y t h a t t h e r e v i v a l of H e b r e w a m o n g
the S a m a r i t a n s took place only a little before t h e time w h e n K ( h a v i n g
no textual tradition behind it) w a s w r i t t e n . A l m o s t a l l t h e liturgical
compositions from t h e 1 4 t h c e n t u r y are in H e b r e w (or H e b r e w m i x e d
w i t h A r a m a i c ) , a n d m a n y K - t y p e H e b r e w forms a r e found in t h e
1 4 t h century liturgical writings, for w h i c h w e possess m a n y M S S d a t e d
only a century or t w o after t h e composition. T h i s does n o t hold true
for the Danafi t e x t , a n d only to a small extent for t h e L e v i t i c a l . T h e r e
is also more confusion of A r a m a i c spellings in K t h a n in t h e other M S S .
T h u s w e h a v e further indication t h a t K. w a s not copied from a n earlier
Aramaic M S .
2 . Addition of long 'a'. A l i f T a w i l a is frequently a d d e d in K : e.g.
n*CTO» for nn»a (f. 1 8 ) ; IVNSHZ? for l^S?© (f. 1 9 ) . L i k e w i s e K tends t o e m
ploy Prosthetic A l e p h more t h a n t h e other M S S : e.g. ninx for j n
(f. 1 8 ) ; nVDOK for nVSD (f. 2 2 ) . W e m a y h a v e here further evidence t h a t
K w a s not copied, b u t written d o w n w i t h forms reflecting t h e 1 4 t h cen
t u r y pronunciation of A r a m a i c , for the e x a m p l e s quoted a n d m a n y others
reveal t h e modern-type pronunciation w i t h initial vowel-sound added.
3 . H e in p r r — i s frequent in K , b u t t h e more usual spelling ]Y>—oc
curs f a i r l y often.
T o s u m u p , K is a n a p p r o x i m a t e Danafi t y p e t e x t w r i t t e n from
m e m o r y a t a time w h e n A r a m a i c w a s n o longer in use a n d H e b r e w h a d
become t h e l i t e r a r y language.
T H E D A N A F I M S S (D)
T h e r e are three M S S of D :
D. 1 (British M u s e u m 7 9 2 3 ) copied in 1 1 5 1 - 4 A . H . ( 1 7 3 8 - 4 1 A . D . ) b y
J a c o b b. M u r j a n b . A b r a h a m b . I s h m a e l (son of scribe of D . 2 A . )
XXX Introduction
3 3
D. 2 A. (Universitatsbibliothek T u b i n g e n M S . or. qu. 1 0 8 6 I) copied
in 1 1 5 4 A . H . ( 1 7 4 1 A . D . ) b y M u r j a n b. A b r a h a m b. Ishmael
(father of scribe of D . 1 a n d brother of scribe of D . 2 B . ) . O n l y for
Books I - I I .
D. 2 B. (Universitatsbibliothek T u b i n g e n M S . or. qu. 1 0 8 6 I I ) , the
continuation of D . 2 A . , copied in 1 1 5 6 A . H . ( 1 7 4 3 A . D . ) b y A b
S a k h w a h b . A b r a h a m b. I s h m a e l (brother of scribe of D . 2 A . ) .
O n l y for B o o k s I I I - V I .
D. 3 ( J o h n R y l a n d s L i b r a r y , Manchester, G a s t e r Collection 825) copied
in 1 3 0 8 A . H . ( 1 8 9 1 A . D . ) b y A b S a k h w a h b. A s ' a d b. Ishmael.
I t h a s a l r e a d y been pointed out t h a t the D M S S are somewhat
closer to K t h a n the L . D . 1 , 2 are from the pens of close relatives, b u t
fortunately D . 3 (not available to R e t t i g a n d his predecessors) is
written t w o a n d a half centuries later. B y t h a t time the influence of the
L M S S h a d become felt a n d indeed D . 3 agrees a t times w i t h L against
the other D M S S , b u t only in the first p a r t of B o o k I a n d also in
B o o k V I , w h e r e D is v e r y close to K .
Description of D M S S
D. 1 (Rettig's T y p e C ) , folios 2 8 7 , used only in microfilm, has far less
irregularities t h a n a n y other M S , although like a n y other scribe, the
D . 1 scribe sometimes missed a w o r d , especially a t the end of a section.
L i k e K , D . 1 e m p l o y s H e for the initial letter of the A p h . more than
do the other M S S .
T h e only frequent error in D . 1 is the omission of Y o d in masculine
plural nouns a n d in Pe'il-type adjectives, as well as (less frequently)
the I m p e r f e c t preformative Y o d .
D.2A. (Rettig's T y p e C ) , folios 8 8 , is written in a close, thin cursive
h a n d . T h e scribe frequently e m p l o y s A r a b i c script a t the ends of lines.
W a t e r s t a i n s exist along the top m a r g i n s , b u t the t e x t is only slightly
affected. M a n y additions are inserted between the A r a b i c a n d A r a m a i c
columns. T h e title of the w o r k in the Colophon is correctly given as
"Memar Marqah."
D.2 B. (Rettig's T y p e C ) , folios 1 8 6 , written in several similar hands,
t h e characters being thin a n d n e a t l y formed; folios 9 0 - 9 6 are out of
order. S o m e A r a b i c annotations are found in a later h a n d in the m a r
gins. S e v e r a l lines are scored through here a n d there. T h e early folios
are b a d l y waterstained along the top a n d side m a r g i n s ; some loss of
t e x t results from d a m a g e to a few folios a t the end.
D . 2 is less consistently accurate t h a n D . 1 , b u t generally more
accurate t h a n the L M S S . S e v e r a l orthographic weaknesses character
1
istic of D . 2 are K» for n», K ? for -p, WID for runs. I n one case the scribe
8 8
Depot der ehemaligen PreuBischen Staatsbibliothek.
T h e present edition XXXI
T H E L E V I T I C A L M S S (L)
T h e r e are three M S S of L :
L. 1 (Universitatsbibliothek T u b i n g e n M S or. qu. 1 0 8 7 ) , copied for
Professor K a h l e in 1 9 0 6 a n d checked b y h i m in 1 9 0 8 , b y Solomon b .
A m r a m b . Solomon a n d A b r a h a m b . Phinehas b . I s a a c b . Solomon
from t h e original c o p y dated 9 3 8 A . H .
L. 2, obtained b y Professor J . B o w m a n in photostat m a d e in N a b l u s .
Copied in 1 2 2 7 A . H . ( 1 8 1 2 A . D . ) b y Solomon b . S a r u r b . J o s e p h b .
Sarur b . I s a a c from a c o p y b y Muslim b . Qabazi (thus L . 2 h a s t h e
value of a 1 6 t h century M S ) .
L. 3 ( J o h n R y l a n d s L i b r a r y , Manchester, G a s t e r Collection 1 8 7 3 ) ,
copied in 1 2 8 3 A . H . ( 1 8 7 0 A . D . ) b y A b H i s d a h b . J a c o b b . A a r o n b .
Solomon.
L M S S are characterized b y a multitude of v a r i a n t spellings a n d
inconsistencies of orthography, a n d b y a substantial n u m b e r of u n
important additions (e.g. w o r d s like naVa ' J U T »nVpn)- T h e y Hebraize
forms m u c h more than t h e D M S S a n d usually agree together in
s y n o n y m s against D .
Description of L M S S
L. 1 (Rettig's T y p e B ) , folios 2 2 1 , written in clear, cursive S a m a r i t a n
w i t h m a n y corrections in t h e margins. Professor K a h l e ' s corrections
and notes are in pencil in the margins. T h i s M S contains numerous mis
spellings and inconsistent orthography; e.g.: confusion and inversion of
11
radicals: paosrv for poasn : pnanx forpnnax.
1 f o r
misspellings: mro* for nirto : rvVw t v ^ K : nniasp for nnaisv
Heb. feminine plur. in n for m; sin for nin:nV for K ^ n n y for
nmj?\ etc.
XXXII Introduction
B R I T I S H M U S E U M H A R L . C O D E X 5 5 1 4 (H)
Folios 2 2 0 (only ji-jfa are for t h e Memar), contains chiefly litur
gical compositions. Consulted b y C o w l e y in preparing his Samaritan
Liturgy (his H . 3 ) . Inferior a n d corrupt t e x t ; only a fragment of
B o o k I . I t agrees more w i t h L than w i t h D . I t is probably to b e dated
early in t h e 1 6 t h century.
34
C o w l e y o b s e r v e s (in effect) t h a t H c a m e from D a m a s c u s , b u t this
fact is not likely to account for the m a n y variants, for these are clearly
the w o r k of a poor scribe. T h e chief v a r i a n t s w h i c h affect the meaning
h a v e been g i v e n in t h e footnotes t o t h e t e x t of B o o k I .
** op. cit. I. p. xii.
T h e present edition XXXIII
B R I T I S H M U S E U M ( G a s t e r Collection) 8 8 3 ( F )
CONCLUDING OBSERVATIONS ON M S S R E L A T I O N S H I P S
Ill
XXXIV Introduction
4. M E M A R MARQAH:
U S E O FS A M A R I T A N P E N T A T E U C H A N D T A R G U M
8 6
See n. 3 above.
Memar M a r q a h : use of S a m a r i t a n P e n t a t e u c h a n d T a r g u m XXXV
37
R e t t i g pointed o u t "Die S p r a c h e M a r q a h s w i r d fur die Beurteilung
des samaritanischen T a r g u m s iiberhaupt v o n W i c h t i g k e i t sein," a n d
this m a y well be true, for the T a r g u m , if a n y authoritative t e x t w a s
ever agreed upon, could h a r d l y antedate M a r q a h b y more t h a n a cen
t u r y or perhaps t w o centuries. T h u s c o m p a r a t i v e w o r k in the field of
M a r q a h a n d T a r g u m studies m i g h t well p r o v e rewarding.
H o w e v e r , not all Marqah's B i b l i c a l quotations are from the T a r g u m .
M a n y references are to the S a m a r i t a n H e b r e w P e n t a t e u c h , a n d there
are m a n y v a r i a n t s here too. I n this connection it m a y be of v a l u e to
compare Marqah's H e b r e w quotations w i t h those of the received t e x t .
I t is perhaps a mistake to assume too readily t h a t the t e x t of the S a m
aritan Pentateuch possessed no v a r i a n t readings. M a r q a h ' s citations,
if reasonably accurately transmitted through the centuries, m a y well
be from a t e x t which antedates b y centuries the well-known A b i s h a '
Scroll revered b y the S a m a r i t a n s themselves a n d h i g h l y regarded b y
some western scholars of the past.
I t is interesting t h a t M a r q a h quotes on occasion first the T a r g u m to
a particular verse a n d then, a few lines later, the H e b r e w t e x t of a n
other part of the verse, or another verse from the same B i b l i c a l passage.
I t is still more interesting a n d intriguing to observe h o w M a r q a h
will sometimes quote the first p a r t of a verse in H e b r e w , immediately
followed b y the T a r g u m for the second p a r t . H e n e v e r quotes the first
part in T a r g u m a n d then the second p a r t from the H e b r e w .
I n v i e w of these n e w sources for pentateuchal H e b r e w a n d A r a m a i c
textual c o m p a r a t i v e s t u d y , such examples h a v e been d r a w n attention
to in the footnotes. N o special reference to ordinary quotations from
the S a m a r i t a n Pentateuch, w h e r e t h e y equate w i t h the received t e x t ,
has been thought necessary. T o h a v e referred to e v e r y quotation w o u l d
h a v e enormously increased the footnotes. I n a n y case, most of t h e
quotations are well-known to a n y student of the S a m a r i t a n H e b r e w
Bible. A l l verses quoted, w h e t h e r from the S a m a r i t a n P e n t a t e u c h or
the T a r g u m , (or p a r t l y from one a n d p a r t l y from the other) h a v e been
listed in A p p e n d i c e s I—III ( P a r t I I ) .
T h e T a r g u m quotations in M a r q a h ' s great w o r k m a y thus p r o v i d e
the oldest k n o w n source for a t e x t (or t e x t s ?) of the T a r g u m , even if
the quotations are merely dated to the oldest M S ( 1 4 t h century) herein
consulted.
I n v i e w of the large number of eastern forms found in the A r a m a i c
texts of the Memar, the possibility t h a t there m a y h a v e existed a
western (Palestinian) a n d an eastern (Syrian) S a m a r i t a n T a r g u m t e x t ,
adds doubly to the potential v a l u e of this t e x t as a source for n e w light
on the history a n d transmission of A r a m a i c versions of the H e b r e w
in*
XXXVI Introduction
5. T H E A R A B I C T R A N S L A T I O N S
6. T H E E N G L I S H TRANSLATION
T h e A n n o t a t i o n s to the Translation
T h e annotations to the t e x t h a v e been restricted to manuscriptural
m a t t e r s and others pertaining to the language a n d its forms, w i t h some
e x p l a n a t o r y notes, especially on the frequent H o p h ' a l form.
I n the case of the annotations to the translations, the purpose has in
the m a i n been explanatory. I t is not claimed t h a t e v e r y m a t t e r arising
in the material h a s been explained or otherwise expounded; only where
the explanation seemed reasonably sure w a s it given. I n a few cases pos
sible explanations h a v e been offered followed b y an interrogation mark.
T h e importance of M e m a r M a r q a h : future research XXXIX
7. T H E I M P O R T A N C E OF MEMAR MARQAH:
FUTURE RESEARCH
The S i x Books
Book I deals w i t h the Commission of Moses a t the B u r n i n g B u s h ,
Moses' dealings w i t h P h a r a o h , the E x o d u s a n d v i c t o r y of the Israelites
a t the R e d Sea.
XL Introduction
4 1
op. cit., passim, pp. 14-16.
XLII Introduction
am a*ns
Vaw mix
T>n •?m
•nVa
npias
OT
]»n na«
TV «?x
ma mx
np «f?x iW^s
nV?BB ma'a *iax
13 n nax
(x)in rux
(rare) pJK px
W K mna tmsx
rnt •nax
IB-IK
a
p Via
an
SIT
wn
pa
T*
nnaa
••sa '•as
-ina
nrvnw
••to
•"31
'JO
The Text 166
•an
rmvp
a -ah •ni
p T»
f a i a i pa'o pcVs 'in
(J^D TW-B pnn
(*ps) oan rbi 'Vi
(inns) m m
n»
WBl/OUj? nil
n
•o
a-w 33T
031 »m
(nat) a-ip
pan
ran nVrn
nm nn P
-p/a/ms mm "•an
••S3 «m
13»nK/T3» svn/mn
(•pi = -pi) T>n T" -pn
mm/ms/D
-3/T
-prmn •pn •pn
"7T8
02B ns/pt
p-ns pr
rnt nt
irnt/rriT ntn
pa/pa SIT
i6 7 Appendix I I
3n
nn»n
j?Dl p3n
rrp»/np«n mn
(variant m» •mn
n»!7 ntn
nmas nitn
mesa
T S
Vn
"•3-1 Wi
«]pnn V-nns
n"?a osn
STW/STCT
*ps
MB! mon
f » "sn
(»1T/p3D p»T »nn
man n3ia
TBB-(K) "•31D
1
Vs/ ? 1
T ?
«nn p»T
pOBN 3m
-1DSS wnins
ipn npirnt
*lj?nn
rip** -ip"-**.
Wj?''
on Ip-'B
nma/T-re*
t nnsn*
(D*?D = p*?n3) *?3 "?na
Ts/-p/a ma
man
s^n/i ••a
nnsi/msi nm-'a/^a
-?na
nx/msa aV?a
p s p/mn p/roa pa
1
S?
•w 18«7
Blip aaV/a"?
p^a p*?na
m"?
P*
••as/mVa oisa
P p
*po • osa
pnns (pna)psa
nnVs/nbs ma
no»p
nisn n a
nnanpa nnapii
303 mis
rip oai
mis 301
pan psi
PW/SM
on-i
pis pss/psis
Appendix I I
aup/axs/a-a
vn S72
OSB «po
•mp nns'o ••5*0
nns "aa "ifi* na-oo 030
3p» naso(s)
prVe "IU r s n s - i pa'o CO
j-ns mo HD
pro pEPD
3n"» poss POD
nnns/ns-'p VipOB VpOD
ns/pt OSS
•n3a/j?-iDB nna fl-ID
ma p-IB p-ID
The Text
i?D2X p1B(8)
pnsa
nsx nx HX
(nna*) rwiwx "HDXK
rwit npix p-x/pix
pintMt aVasx aVx
V7X nSX nsx
••S3 -px nnx
nn nrn tin
ntan wn wn
-ip*-B OR-I/DT DIT
an
j?Sl am am
psnwa/p-aw pn pn
Wpl wn (win) wn
nta •»a*i(8) ••an
•wi nm nm
TO
VD
tan nnw nnw
-aw nta nta
,,
-a-i8/ m nta
mw waw waw
nma» wawn
3ta piw piw
npix/nps p'wn
i nnsw nsw
••31D •rows) *iaw
nin npwn npw
niw spw spw
tfn mw nw
•nw
w -inw *nw
nma (is)
The Text
«lpn «lpn
A P P E N D I X III
ORTHOGRAPHIC VARIANTS
AND THEIR STANDARDIZATION
The Verb
v a r i a n t forms (S)
Aph'el V»Bn: V»SBK *?SBK
Ithpa'el tafonn bsom
(Heb.) H o p h ' a l "757D8 "wan
(Heb.) Niph<al «?»B1
Pe'al imper. V » D H : V r s : VSPK V » B K : Vt: V » K
The Noun
V a r i a n t form (S)
nn
(n=) ns
s-ns mis
nan nas
rvVn n-Vs
rnn man
wt=) nns sns
sinns inns
vms
jrrrro rrna
nrvax nn-u
nat nan
sim im
svn vn
(*t=) p s isn
ma mn
in sin
"•n wn
m» nin
pis pin
Appendix I I I
rms p-nn
C>-J=) T P
1
Truer ? In*?? 1
rrw ?
xina ina
wna ••na
T,xia pa
"sa ••na
psa pna
(snroa 138
5? 221 nxi
ip»
nns
nainp/nxanj? nanp
a-bp B13j?
rpsra") nsra-i
••aw •w
-*~»/«jji>=) mw •nnw
MEMAR MARQAH
THE T E A C H I N G OF MARQAH
E D I T E D AND TRANSLATED
BY
J O H N M A C D O N A L D
V O L U M E I I : T H E T R A N S L A T I O N
1963
V E R L A G A L F R E D T O P E L M A N N • B E R L I N
B E I H E F T E ZUR ZEITSCHRIFT FUR DIE
ALTTESTAMENTLICHE WISSENSCHAFT
H E R A U S G E G E B E N VON GEORG FOHRER
84
©
1963
by Alfred Topelmann, Berlin 30, Genthiner StraBe 13
Printed in Germany
Archiv-Nr. 3822633 II
LIST OF CONTENTS
Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel 85
§ 1 The L e v i t i c a l Prerogatives 87
§ 2 The S t a t u s of a H o l y People 89
§3 The S t a t u s of the E l d e r s 94
§4 The Blessing 97
VI L i s t of Contents
§ 5 T h e Curse 105
§6 Social E t h i c s "4
§ 7 On S e x u a l Offences i*9
§ 8 J u d g e m e n t s on E v i l Motives 122
§9 T h e Curse on Disobedience 124
§ 10 Instructions to the L e a d e r s of Israel 126
§ 1 T h e N a t u r e of Creation 213
§ 2 T h e U s e of W i s d o m 215
§ 3 T h e W r i t i n g of the W o r d of G o d 220
§ 4 T I T a n d Moses 225
§5 N U N a n d Moses 228
§ 6 S I M K A T a n d Moses 229
§ 7 P H I a n d Moses 233
§ 8 S A D I a n d Moses 236
§ 9 Q O P H a n d Moses 238
§ 1 0 T A V a n d Moses 240
§ 1 1 A L A F — H E a n d Moses 242
BOOK I
From the Call of Moses to the Exodus
IN T H E NAME OF GOD
T H E BOOK OF W O N D E R S
b y M a r q a h (the L o r d ' s F a v o u r be upon him)
§ i. I N T R O D U C T I O N T O T H E R E V E L A T I O N §.i
§ 2. GOD'S F I R S T A D D R E S S T O M O S E S
THE COMMISSION
7
Then He said, I am the God of your fathers ( E x . iii. 6). T a k e from m e
8
d i v i n i t y a n d w i t h it m a k e y o u r prophethood strong. I a m H e w h o
g a v e (new) life to A d a m after his death a n d t r e a t e d h i m w i t h p i t y —
w h e n he said / heard the sound of Thee in the garden, and I was afraid
. . . and I hid myself (Gen. iii. 1 0 ; T a r g . ) — f o r t h e second time, because
it w a s necessary.
1 8
I.e. stagnant water as distinct from living/running water. See the contrast as set
1 9 A
out in Book IV, § 2. So D , but I > ^ ^1 = tributary of Eden ? Or ^ J * £ > =
2 0 2 1
branch of Eden. atsaa = «]»3n = -
t Lit. 'in the hearing . . . ' . This is a
r
common idiom for 'in the presence of the unseen and seen worlds', with special
ref. to angels.
8 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I. §.2
L o , I shall declare t o y o u the n a m e , t h a t t h e y m a y know. T h e r e is in
their possession a sign w h i c h h a s been inherited from A b r a h a m . T h i s
n a m e w h i c h I reveal to y o u , m y prophet, is the sign t h a t they m a y
k n o w of deliverance. Consider a n d hear now from me w h a t it is, and do
not b e too eager to proclaim it in their presence."
T h e w o r l d a n d all the creatures in it trembled w h e n G o d said to
Moses,
I am who I am ( E x . iii. 1 4 ) , w h o w a s and will be, a root without a
beginning.
I am who I am, the one w h o existed in the beginning and will be
on M o u n t S i n a i .
I am who I am, c o m m a n d e r of the world a n d summoner of the
creatures.
I am who I am, creator of t h e b o d y a n d originator of the soul.
I am who I am, w h o set u p the G a r d e n and b r o u g h t about the
recompense on S o d o m .
I am who I am, m a k e r of life a n d establisher of death.
22
J am who I am, G o d of the R i g h t e o u s a n d L o r d of the H e b r e w s .
2 8
I.e. ELOHIM to the Righteous Patriarchs, and YHWH to the Tribes thereafter.
I. §.2 God's F i r s t A d d r e s s to Moses. T h e Commission. 9
There is no origin to H i s power, no offshoot of H i s sovereignty. H e
Himself is the origin of the w o r l d a n d the offshoot of H i s creation. N o
beginning is k n o w n to H i m . H e is eternal. H e h a s no beginning a n d no
end. H e it is w h o k n o w s w h a t h a s been a n d k n o w s w h a t is y e t to be.
H e reveals Himself in m a j e s t y , b u t is concealed from all. H e is never
observed.
H e called to A b r a h a m a n d he w a l k e d after H i m . L e t none forget
H i m as long as the w o r l d exists.
H e sought I s a a c a n d h e bound his b o d y before H i m . N o t h i n g is
concealed from H i m throughout all generations.
H e apportioned to J a c o b magnificent gifts. N o n e c a n c i r c u m v e n t
2 3
H i m or prevent t h e m from reaching H i m .
2 3
Or 'him' (Jacob, synonymous for the Hebrew tribes).
io Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I. §.2
sign t h a t I shall s h o w them, w h e n in fact t h e y do not understand m y
speech, since t h e y will s a y , The Lord did not appear to you?" ( E x . i v . 1 ;
Targ.).
T h e L o r d said to him, "Blessed is the hearer w h o is w o r t h y to hear
all this from his L o r d ! L e t y o u r heart b e strong, m y prophet, for I will
manifest t o y o u the signs w h i c h y o u are to perform before the congre
gation. What is that in your hand?" ( E x . iv. 2 ; T a r g . ) .
L e t the speaker be praised a n d the hearer glorified,
for he answered a n d said,
"A rod ( E x . iv. 2 ; T a r g . ) out of fire h a s been given to m e b y T h y good
ness, w i t h great sovereignty."
"Cast it n o w from y o u r h a n d on the ground ( E x . iv. 3 ; T a r g . ) , t h a t
y o u m a y see, m y prophet, w h a t is going to happen s t r a i g h t w a y . "
So he cast it on the ground ( E x . iv. 3 ; T a r g . ) immediately a t the c o m
m a n d of his L o r d , a t H i s good intent. Moses h a d no sooner t h r o w n it
from his h a n d t h a n it became a serpent (ibid.), the sight of it terrifying!
H e q u a k e d a n d b a c k e d a w a y ; then out of the sheer intensity of his
fear Moses fled from it (ibid.) a n d w a s in great alarm. T h e r e w a s never
a n y t h i n g like it, nor the extreme alarm of his heart. H e w a s quite un
able t o approach it a t the time. H i s heart w a s full of confusion; he said
then, " T h i s is a m i g h t y m a r v e l . I cannot comprehend this great power
in d r y w o o d . I t becomes a serpent, m o v i n g about in front of me, ter
rifying m y mind. I cannot comprehend such a n exceedingly extra
o r d i n a r y thing. Y e t the earth is nothing. A n y t h i n g t h a t comes from it
24
is b a r r e n . N o one looks for a m i g h t y , alarming deed from it! I a m in
consternation because of it, for I s i m p l y cannot comprehend it. H a d
it not been for the glorious L o r d , I w o u l d h a v e fallen a n d w o u l d h a v e
been unable to rise a n d face it for a moment, b u t I h a d to flee so t h a t
I m i g h t not see it. T h e q u a k i n g of m y heart a n d the weakness of m y
sight are terrible, arising from seeing its form."
Moses h a d no sooner finished talking to himself t h a n he w a s a n
s w e r e d b y the great Subduer, w i t h w h o m there is no other god. " D o
n o t be frightened of it, O prophet of the w o r l d ! I n m y great power I
c a n create something more powerful t h a n it. Strengthen y o u r heart,
m y prophet, in the face of all the wonders, for y o u will be required to
face even greater t h a n this. Put out your hand, and take it by the tail
( E x . iv. 4 ; T a r g . ) , for y o u will n o w behold a wonder out of m y power.
L i f t it u p in y o u r h a n d ! " I t turned b a c k to w h a t it w a s , no more, no less!
T h e n the great prophet Moses marvelled a n d said, " A l l great things
2 6
belong to the m i g h t y P o w e r , w h o does all t h a t H e wills a n d changes
H i s a c t s b y H i s tremendous p o w e r . "
2 4 2 6
So C. p. 31 x. Or 'the Great Power'. This gnostic or gnostic-style term is that
applied to Simon Magus. See the discussion in R.M. Grant, Gnosticism and Early
Christianity, New York, 1959, chapter 3.
I. §.2 God's F i r s t A d d r e s s t o Moses. T h e Commission. n
" T h i s miracle I h a v e j u s t s h o w n y o u is done that they may believe
that I a m their M a k e r a n d the God of their fathers, Abraham, Isaac and
Jacob ( E x . iv. 5 ; T a r g . ) , the T h r e e Perfect Ones w i t h w h o m I m a d e
covenants. I h a v e s h o w n y o u , m y prophet, the first w o n d e r a n d y o u
marvelled a t it a n d w e r e exceedingly afraid. B e g i n n o w t o see the
second miracle presented."
Again, the Lord said to him—great is t h e P o w e r f u l One w h o t h u s
spoke! Blessed is the hearer a n d w h a t he h e a r d from his L o r d ! Put
your hand into your bosom ( E x . iv. 6; T a r g . ) , a n d do not, m y prophet,
d e l a y haste in c a r r y i n g out y o u r action."
H e heard w h a t his M a k e r said to h i m , a n d he p u t his h a n d speedily
into his bosom, not knowing w h a t w a s going to happen to it. H e b r o u g h t
his h a n d out after t h a t , as his L o r d h a d c o m m a n d e d him, a n d s a w t h a t
it w a s dead, without a n y flesh (cf. ibid.). H e stood there in great con
26
sternation, studying his h a n d , unable to speak w i t h his t o n g u e . He
could h a v e fled, but he could not stop his heart from its terrible fear
2 7
resulting from his action in fleeing from t h e r o d . H e s a w in his right
h a n d something more terrible t h a n it. H e looked a t his r i g h t h a n d a n d
the sight of it w a s terrifying; he w a s unable to flee, nor could he
(continue to) look a t it. H e could not c a s t his right h a n d from h i m , for
he w a s to do wonders w i t h it.
W h e n his L o r d s a w h i m standing in considerable distress, H e caused
the fear in him to subside. H e said, Put your hand back into your bosom
( E x . iv. 7 ; T a r g . ) , a n d let all this dread be r e m o v e d from y o u r heart.
W h e n y o u insert y o u r hand, let it not remain in y o u r bosom. B r i n g it
out immediately, for y o u r a m a z e m e n t will be g r e a t . "
T h e prophet did as his L o r d h a d c o m m a n d e d him. H e inserted his
h a n d and then w i t h d r e w it, a n d lo, it w a s j u s t as it h a d been before!
28
T h e n his h e a r t w a s relieved of t h a t fear, a n d he praised the L o r d of
the world, the doer of e v e r y wonder. H e said to H i m , " T h e s e e x
ceedingly wonderful signs are b e y o n d the mind, for it cannot credit
all T h y deeds. T h e r e is no end to T h y power, O K i n g of the
world."
" O m y prophet, take these t w o signs. If they will not believe ( E x . iv. 8 ;
Targ.) in them, I will bring about one greater t h a n these. Perform t h e
first before them, a n d then the second, just as I did before y o u . If they
will not believe even these two signs ( E x . iv. 9 ; T a r g . ) , then w i t h m y
2 9
wonders their iniquity will be prevented from reaching y o u . You
shall take some water of the Nile and pour it upon the dry land (ibid.),
t h a t it m a y become blood b y m y sovereign p o w e r — m i g h t y wonders
2 8 A 2 7
Lit. 'rod', but . u c 'his rod', 'his tongue'. This statement is obscure and may
A 2 8
be the result of interference with the text. The versions are equally obscure. Lit.
2 9
'self'. The lit. meaning is 'their iniquity will be crushed, in case it reaches you'.
12 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I. §.2
30
terrifying all hearts! N o one will be a b l e to do them except you, for
y o u are m y second in the lower w o r l d . "
GOD A D D R E S S E S AARON
The Lord said to Aaron, Go ( E x . iv. 2 7 ; T a r g . ) a n d meet your
brother, a n d receive from h i m the secrets h e holds.
The Lord said to Aaron, Go a n d meet y o u r brother, for y o u are
38
about to become his p r o p h e t .
The Lord said to Aaron, Go a n d meet y o u r brother. B e c a u s e of
y o u he will w a g e victorious w a r against P h a r a o h the king.
The Lord said to Aaron, Go a n d meet y o u r brother, for through
seeing y o u his heart will be strengthened.
The Lord said to Aaron, Go a n d meet y o u r brother, for his sons
a n d wife h a v e departed from him, a n d he is alone, left all b y him
self on the w a y .
If it h a s not occurred to him t h a t his heart is straitened, I k n o w t h a t
in y o u r heart is something greater t h a n in his, a n d w i t h y o u he will
conquer there in battle. I h a v e given h i m m y name, so t h a t he need
not fear. I h a v e provided a rod for h i m out of the fire. I h a v e shown
h i m m y signs, t h a t his heart m a y not w e a k e n . Despite that, he said,
' I a m inexpert in speaking', b u t I said to him, concerning y o u , ' H e will
be y o u r prophet'. S a i d he, ' W i l l h e understand w h a t I s a y ?' B e y o u a t
ease! B e a good intermediary. A r i s e in the morning to meet y o u r
brother in the desert; go a n d meet him a t the Mountain of G o d — t w o
3 9
lights going o u t to each other."
So he went and met him at the mountain of God ( E x . iv. 2 7 ; T a r g . ) —
the sun a n d t h e moon w h o c a m e together from A m r a m a n d
Jochebed.
So he went and met him at the mountain of God—the Tigris a n d
E u p h r a t e s joined together.
H o w good t o see t h e m embracing there, between them great j o y , the
one kissing the other w i t h tears in their eyes, h a v i n g double love for
one another. " W e l c o m e , m y brother," A a r o n said to Moses, " T h e y e a r s
h a v e been too long for m e since last seeing y o u . T i m e is short! T h e G o d
of the world h a s proclaimed to m e in y o u r n a m e . "
8 8 3 9 A A
I.e. 'spokesman' as the Sam. interpret it. L, D , L 'embracing' (c^^itse^).
I- §§-3.4 Moses a n d A a r o n enter E g y p t 15
§ 4. M O S E S A N D A A R O N E N T E R E G Y P T §.4
T h e y entered E g y p t without being u n d u l y e x p e c t a n t about a n y
thing, b u t the Good One w a s with them in the unseen, invisible. T h e y
slept t h a t night and arose next morning a n d hastily assembled the
E l d e r s of the congregation ( E x . iv. 2 9 ) . A a r o n revealed to t h e m the
name w h i c h his L o r d h a d disclosed to Moses ( E x . iv. 3 0 ) . T h e i r hearts
were gladdened w h e n they heard t h a t ; t h e y said to one another, " T h i s
is a sign showing us that deliverance is near."
After t h a t A a r o n performed the signs in their presence, a n d t h e y all
believed ( E x . iv. 3 1 ) that G o d h a d sent them t h a t d a y . W h e n the chiefs
heard, t h e y reported to the whole congregation, a n d t h e y too believed
and g a v e thanks. T h e y uttered w o r d s of praise, as on the d a y w h e n
Pharaoh the king died. T h e y sighed and t h e y cried aloud; t h e y pro
40
c l a i m e d , " G o d remembers! H e does not forget a n y t h i n g . " They
*° Pa'el.
16 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I. §.4
bowed their heads and worshipped ( E x . iv. 3 1 ; T a r g . ) the G o d of their
fathers.
HARDSHIP OF T H E H E B R E W SLAVES
4 2
T h e y were given no s t r a w for the manufacture of b r i c k s ( E x . v . 7 ) .
I n addition, the rate of their m a n u f a c t u r e of bricks w a s in no w a y re
duced for t h e m ( E x . v . 8 ) , b u t in fact t h e y w e r e h a r d pressed, more
t h a n ever. T h e i r servitude too w a s stepped u p more than previously.
I n the morning t h e y rose early t o endure burdens bitter for them to
bear, so m u c h so t h a t there w e r e tears in their eyes. T h e y w e n t about in
the l a n d of E g y p t engaged in gathering stubble for s t r a w to m a k e
bricks ( E x . v . 1 2 ) . T h e t a s k m a s t e r s w e r e even more overbearing to-
u
Probably a proverb. Here a command to the people to go on with their various
4 2
occupations. The J passage (verse 3) is passed over here. So J's verses 5ff. are
greatly reduced, or brief E equivalents underly Marqah's exposition.
Moses a n d A a r o n enter E g y p t 17
W h e n Moses a n d A a r o n h e a r d w h a t t h e y h a d said, t h e y w e r e in
great distress. Moses said to t h e L o r d , his h e a r t full of fear, " O L o r d ,
44
tell me w h a t this m y s t e r y is. F o r s i n c e I came to Pharaoh to speak in
thy name, he has done evil to this people ( E x . v . 2 3 ; T a r g . ) , g r e a t evil.
T h e people are in torment, w i t h greater a n d greater distress upon t h e m
t h a n ever before, a n d h a r d s h i p is renewed e v e r y d a y more t h a n the
d a y before."
The Lord said to Moses ( E x . v i . 1 ; T a r g . ) , " M y prophet, there will be
no warning. Soon y o u will see g r e a t wonders in him, for I shall harden
his heart a n d at the end m e m o r y of h i m will be c u t off. I will reveal
to y o u m y great n a m e Y H W H . I did not reveal it to the R i g h t e o u s of
the w o r l d ( E x . v i . 3 ) . E L - S H A D D A I w a s the n a m e b y w h i c h I revealed
myself to A b r a h a m , I s a a c a n d J a c o b . B u t this great n a m e I d i d not
r e v e a l to them. I t is a glorious n a m e w h i c h fills the whole of creation.
B y it the w o r l d is bonded together a n d all the c o v e n a n t s w i t h t h e
Righteous are bound b y it for ever. I shall not forget it as long as t h e
4 5
world exists. S i n c e y o u a r e w i t h the Most H i g h of the whole w o r l d , I
h a v e revealed to y o u m y great n a m e .
4 3
I.e. the forefathers. Or, render 'The (Egyptian) people said, "We have not
4 4
since the day they (the Hebrews) con = p + noo (T6TE), and hence =
4 5
Heb. TKH. Lit. 'are found in the hands of.
18 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I. §.4
See, I make you as God to Pharaoh; and Aaron your brother shall
be your prophet ( E x . v i i . 1 ; T a r g . ) .
See, I make you as God to Pharaoh, so t h a t y o u will e x a c t venge
ance on h i m for the congregation.
See, I make you as God to Pharaoh, t h a t he a n d all his people m a y
b e destroyed.
See, I make you as God to Pharaoh, through the rod w h i c h I g a v e
y o u to reveal wonders.
See, I make you as God to Pharaoh b y m y will. D e s t r o y all the
E g y p t i a n s in a t w i n k l i n g of the e y e .
See, I make you, as God to Pharaoh. I shall p u t him in y o u r power,
a n d y o u will s l a y h i m in judgement.
See, I make you as God to Pharaoh. Y o u are the redeemer of the
blood of t h e sons of the Righteous.
See, I make you as God to Pharaoh. B e not afraid of him, for I h a v e
p u t h i m in y o u r power.
See, I make you as God to Pharaoh. H e is defeated before y o u a n d
y o u h a v e no need of a n y assistance.
I t is set out in the schoolhouse—and y o u are the teacher.
B e g i n t o teach therein the judgements on P h a r a o h . Hearken to m e
a n d repeat t o A a r o n , t h a t he m a y interpret before P h a r a o h king of
E g y p t . A r i s e , go, Moses the son of m y house, for I intend to teach y o u
wonderful things.
T h e first of the wonderful things y o u are
going to do before P h a r a o h the king:
G o , y o u a n d A a r o n , to him a n d t h r o w the rod in front of him. I t w i l l
become a serpent, j u s t as it turned into a serpent in front of yourself
a n d y o u fled from it in great fear. I n the same w a y it will soon happen,
a n d P h a r a o h a n d all his servants will b e petrified b y it. T h r o u g h y o u
he will see wonders, a n d w h e n e v e r he hardens his attitude, the judge
4 6
m e n t will b e all the greater on h i m .
L e t us hear from Moses a n d A a r o n
the secrets written d o w n !
SECOND A D D R E S S TO PHARAOH
4 6
Most of the P material (Ex. vi. 2-vii. 13) is passed over.
Moses a n d A a r o n enter E g y p t 19
1 8 4 9
" Add. as L. Or "What! Give them permission ?' Pe Nun Verbs often
lose Nun in the Perfect.
20 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I. §§.4.5
(Moses a n d A a r o n ) said, " H e h a s not sent us to y o u without a sign
a n d wonder, in order t h a t y o u m a y believe t h a t H e is true G o d . H e
w o u l d not h a v e sent requesting this people from y o u h a d H e not k n o w n
t h a t truth is not w i t h y o u . T h e y are pledged in H i s h a n d b y a w o r d ,
5 0
a n d the time for i t h a s arrived. T h e i r L o r d desires the redemption of
t h e pledge n o w , a n d H e desires to t a k e H i s o w n property."
P h a r a o h said, " I f there is a sign or wonder, manifest them here and
now. S h o w w h e t h e r y o u r mysteries are true or not."
§.5 § 5. T H E F I R S T JUDGEMENT
W h e n t h e y heard w h a t P h a r a o h the king said, their heart w a s em
boldened a n d t h e y w e r e g r e a t l y strengthened. Aaron threw down his
rod before Pharaoh and it became a serpent ( E x . v i i . 1 0 ; T a r g . ) — a ter
rifying sight! P h a r a o h a n d all his counsellors looked a t it a n d great
dread fell upon them. T h e serpent opened its mouth before P h a r a o h as
though it w o u l d come intending to s w a l l o w h i m u p , and it fixed its
e y e s like lightning t o w a r d s h i m , as if coming w i t h intent to burn him
up. P h a r a o h looked a t his assembled counsellors a n d began to seek
a d v i c e on immediate action. H i s counsellors said t o him, " O K i n g , w e
a n d y o u are in a dilemma. T h i s is a great miracle, the like of w h i c h w e
h a v e not seen. W e believe t h a t there is none like it in the whole land
of E g y p t , not since t h e d a y it w a s created. S e n d w o r d now, summon
all the sages, to see w h e t h e r t h e y k n o w w h a t this wonder is, whether it
is the w o r k of sorcerers, for it is in their p o w e r to tell y o u , O K i n g . "
|i H e a r w h a t P h a r a o h answered them, his heart full of extreme dis
quiet—it w a s like iron. H i s servants, w h o stood about the palace, were
n o w unable to leave the door of the palace to go outside. " I k n o w they
are disquieted like m e " (said P h a r a o h ) , a n d are unable to m o v e to
right or left."
A l l the servants w h o w e r e outside fell on their faces in great fear
(when t h e y heard this). " I f a c r y of shame were to be cast against m e
a n d all w h o listen t o m e c r y ' H e is to be blamed' against m e — I f I knew
t h e y w o u l d do this, I w o u l d not g i v e them permission to come to me,
nor w o u l d I myself d e s p a i r — I w h o a m like those w h o go into battle
victoriously a n d o v e r t a k e their enemies—whom t h e y do not even
know!"
W h e n the servants outside heard t h a t the king w a s himself in a
dilemma, the c a m e a n d stood in his presence; t h e y said to him—from
a d i s t a n c e — " T e l l us w h a t y o u w a n t us t o do." H e replied, " Q u i c k l y
81
bring t o m e the sages a n d sorcerers."
T h e y arose a t once in great fear, a s quick as a flash, a n d told these,
" M a k e haste n o w to P h a r a o h the king, for he is in great anxiety. H i s
5 0 6 1 A
I.e. the redemption of the pledge. But consistently 'philosophers' for 'sorcerers'.
I. §.5 T h e First Judgement 21
b o d y is w e a k a n d he is faint." T h e y got u p a n d followed t h e m in con
siderable wonderment. W h e n t h e y c a m e a n d looked o v e r the gate of
Pharaoh's palace a n d s a w h i m a n d all his servants frozen w i t h fear,
t h e y passed through a n d entered the presence of P h a r a o h the king.
T h e y found him fainting, the serpent in front of h i m menacing, w h i l e
he w a s in terror of the serpent lest it should s w a l l o w h i m .
Moses a n d A a r o n w e r e like t w o lights, their faces g i v i n g light in
Pharaoh's abode. W h e n the sages and sorcerers arrived, t h e y addressed
P h a r a o h the king, " D o not b e afraid of it. I t will soon depart. B r a c e
yourself n o w . "
T h e magicians said, " W e are able to do the like of t h a t . T h e s e m e n
will not get the better of y o u . W e shall do the same as this (wonder) in
y o u r o w n presence. If these are the doings of sorcerers, then w e are
truly the chief of sorcerers. T h i s is a most shameful thing, t h a t the
heart of a king like y o u should be in such terror o v e r the w o r k of sor
cerers. N o w w e shall do the same deed before y o u r v e r y e y e s ; then y o u
will know w h o are the conquerors a m o n g u s . "
(Pharaoh said), " W i n m y battle, for I a m overcome in the face of
this serpent. I shall not keep y o u r offices for y o u unless, on the occasion
of such an hour as this, wonders a n d signs pass before me. I h a v e not
seen the like of this m a r v e l since the d a y I w a s born. W e r e I not g r e a t l y
encouraged b y the sight of y o u , m y spirit w o u l d depart from m e . "
"Console yourself! D o not be afraid of it, for w e h a v e in our p o w e r
something t h a t is greater t h a n it in skill." T h e y c a s t d o w n their rods
a n d they all became serpents around it ( E x . vii. 1 2 ) . P h a r a o h a n d all
his counsellors looked a t the serpents w h i c h the sorcerers h a d brought
into being—a wondrously j o y o u s sight (for them). ( S a i d t h e y ) , " T h e
brothers do not glory over us n o w ! "
T h e serpent looked to its right a n d to its left a n d s a w the other ser
pents ganging u p against it. I t opened its mouth a n d s w a l l o w e d t h e
whole lot in a flash ( E x . vii. 1 2 ) ; then it turned on P h a r a o h seeking to
swallow him too. H i s b o d y became even w e a k e r t h a n it w a s . T h e sor
51
cerers stood in great confusion " and essayed to produce something to
crush it, b u t t h e y were unable to do a n y t h i n g to it. W h e n P h a r a o h s a w
t h a t the sorcerers were defeated, he h a d t o y i e l d t o Moses a n d A a r o n .
H e said to them, " D r i v e off the serpent q u i c k l y from m y palace. M y
spirit despairs because of it a n d I a m in great a n d terrible distress.
T h a t w h i c h y o u demand I will do for y o u . B e patient, for y o u r d e m a n d
is in y o u r o w n hands. T h e evening d r a w s near a n d there is no oppor
52
t u n i t y during the d a y to speak a n d listen t o y o u . T h i s is a m i g h t y
serpent and m y heart is terrified of it, a n d m y spirit is w e a k before it.
D r i v e it a w a y n o w from m y presence. If it remains another hour before
6 2
*ia Or = nn»33, 'in shame'. Lit. 'room'.
22 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I. §.5
m e , I shall die. I fear lest it swallow u p e v e r y t h i n g else." W h e n it
s w a l l o w e d u p the rods, consternation increased, for it swallowed u p all
t h e serpents a n d y e t there w a s no increase in its size! " I t is (still)
h u n g r y , for it looks as though it w o u l d s w a l l o w m e u p too. M y spirit is
n o t a t ease a s long as the serpent is w i t h m e in the palace. A l l the limbs
53
of m y b o d y are lifeless because of it. Undeniable is this miracle w h i c h
y o u h a v e manifested. I t is a sign demonstrating its reality. T a k e it
a w a y a n d depart. C o m e again in the morning a n d I shall speak the
t r u t h to y o u . "
A a r o n stretched out his h a n d , a n d behold the serpent became a rod
as it h a d been before!
Praised be the doer of wonders, w h o does
w h a t H e wills w i t h all t h a t is H i s .
A t the approach of evening Moses a n d A a r o n departed, their hearts
filled w i t h exultation, h a v i n g beheld the t r i u m p h of their G o d as H e
protected t h e m a n d subdued their foes before them w i t h H i s tremendous
power. A f t e r their departure, P h a r a o h began to devise evil. H e said to
his servants, " I shall go out t o m o r r o w for a pleasant w a l k b y the river.
If Moses a n d A a r o n come in the morning, s a y to them, " T u r n b a c k !
T h e king is off to w a r . P h a r a o h is in secret session w i t h his servants."
T h e k n o w e r of m y s t e r i e s reveals P h a r a o h ' s secrets!
Then the Lord said to Moses, " S e t forth in the morning ( E x . vii. 1 5 ;
T a r g . ) ; go to the river to meet P h a r a o h , for he has planned his de
parture for the w a t e r in the morning in order to flee from me, lest he
encounter y o u . Declare to h i m on m y authority w i t h bold heart, "Let
my people go, that they may serve me" ( E x . v i i . 1 6 ; T a r g . ) .
If y o u refuse to let m y people go, the w a t e r of the river will be
smitten a n d will flow w i t h blood.
If y o u refuse to let m y people go, y o u will be oppressing the living
5 4
a n d h a r m i n g the d e a d .
If y o u refuse to let m y people go, then the whole land of E g y p t
will b e d e s t r o y e d through oppression.
If y o u refuse to let m y people go, y o u yourself a n d all the E g y p t
ians w i t h y o u will perish.
Behold, I will strike the Nile with the rod that is in my hand a n d all
the w a t e r it contains will be turned into blood ( E x . vii. 1 7 ; T a r g . ) .
T h e perfect ones arose as their L o r d h a d c o m m a n d e d them, a n d they
found P h a r a o h standing b y the river. P h a r a o h looked a n d s a w them
a t once. H e stood there in g r e a t consternation—never w a s there the
like of i t ! H e looked a t his chief ministers a n d said to them in an under
tone, " W e h a v e m a d e a mistake in w h a t w e h a v e done. I came out to
6 3 6 4
Lit. 'empty'. Lit. 'the speakers and the silent ones', a common fig. for 'the
living and the dead'.
I. §§-5,6 T h e Second J u d g e m e n t 23
§ 6. T H E S E C O N D J U D G E M E N T §.6
W h e n the t w o prophets s a w the stubbornness revealed to them, t h e y
began to do w h a t their L o r d h a d c o m m a n d e d them. And the Lord said
to Moses, "Say to Aaron, 'Stretch out your hand ( E x . vii. 1 9 ; T a r g . ) over
the river a n d smite it, a n d it will become blood throughout the whole
60
of E g y p t , even among the trees and a m o n g the s t o n e s . ' "
H a p p y are those a l r e a d y dead, for he will kill
the living w i t h his o w n h a n d !
I t w a s done mightily throughout the whole of E g y p t . P h a r a o h w a s
standing b y the river, his head b o w e d d o w n before it a n d unable to go
5 5 5 6 6 7 A 5 8
Lit. 'my'. Lit. 'deviate'. So . Cf. -rp-> = slow (of speech). Lit.
6 9 A 8 0
'accursed'. So ; this verse obscure. Cf. the end of Ex. vii. 19, where the
ref. is to different forms of wood and stone.
24 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I. §.6
GOD'S T H I R D A D D R E S S TO P H A R A O H
§ 7. T H E T H I R D JUDGEMENT
And the Lord said to Moses, "Say to Aaron, 'Stretch out your hand
with your rod over the rivers . . . and cause frogs to come upon a n d cover
all the land of Egypt ( E x . viii. 5 ; T a r g . ) , a n d the enemies of the con
gregation will be oppressed b y t h e m . ' "
T h e t w o prophets did as their M a k e r h a d c o m m a n d e d them. F r o g s
came u p over the whole l a n d of E g y p t . G r e a t w a s the affliction t h a t
w a s wrought there! T h e river s w a r m e d a n d the houses w e r e filled (with
them). Bodies wore in torment, souls in a g o n y , hearts in anguish. W h e n
Pharaoh s a w the sentence w r o u g h t on him, he summoned the sorcerers
to m a k e an end of it. T h e y performed their s o r c e r y — a s a result the
judgement on P h a r a o h w a s intensified! T h e y succeeded in smiting, b u t
were unable to heal. T h e king w a s in great distress. T h e sorcerers on
w h o m he relied were collapsing!
T h e method of all physicians w h o c a m e to a sick person w a s to g i v e
him medicines to drink, perchance he might be healed. T h e s e sorcerers
came to their king, w h o w a s a loathsome sight during the judgements
w h i c h were ever intensified. W h e n P h a r a o h realized t h a t there w a s no
cure from them, he cried to Moses a n d A a r o n , " P r a y to y o u r L o r d w h o m
y o u worship, t h a t H e remove from m e this great sentence (cf. E x .
viii. 8). M a k e speed in p r a y i n g for m e n o w , a n d I will let the people go
t h a t t h e y m a y sacrifice to the L o r d . "
T h e t w o of them w e n t out and p r a y e d as he h a d requested ( E x . viii.
1 2 ) . T h e frogs ceased from him and his servants, but when Pharaoh saw
that there was a respite, he hardened his heart and would not listen to them
( E x . viii. 1 5 ; T a r g . ) . H e said, " W e h a v e borne the judgement a n d w e
will not let the people g o . "
I t w a s as though the T r u e One were s a y i n g to h i m ,
" Y o u r destruction is a t h a n d . "
§ 8. F O U R T H - T E N T H JUDGEMENTS
THE FOURTH JUDGEMENT
Then the Lord said to Moses and Aaron after this, "Strike the dust of
the earth, that it may become gnats." ( E x . viii. 1 6 ; T a r g . ) . T h e y d i d as
26 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I. §8
67
the L o r d h a d c o m m a n d e d . G n a t s c a m e into b e i n g throughout the
l a n d of E g y p t . All the dust of the earth became gnats ( E x . viii. 1 7 ; T a r g . ) ,
oppressing the living a n d h a r m i n g all the dead. T h e sorcerers realized
68
t h e y themselves w e r e overcome, for t h e y started to drive them off,
b u t w e r e unsuccessful. W h e n the sorcerers s a w t h a t t h e y were them
selves v i c t i m s , t h e y said to P h a r a o h , "This is the finger of God ( E x . viii.
1 9 ; T a r g . ) . I t is not within our p o w e r to fight the G o d of the prophets.
K n o w t h a t their G o d is a doer of wonders ( E x . x v . n ) . T h e y are able
to destroy and build u p , while w e destroy, b u t cannot build u p w h a t
y o u desire."
P h a r a o h said to them, " B e g i n for me the ending of y o u r decree from
6 9
m e . D o not tire yourselves this d a y . R e s t r a i n y o u r evil intent. Pre
pare greater retaliations t h a n these. B e wrathful against them." T h e y
w e n t out, leaving h i m confounded a n d his face ashen. T h e gnats con
tinued on him, till it w a s said of him, " T h e flies are fed b y the power of
7 0
G o d as revenge on y o u . T u r n b a c k from y o u r error and release Israel,
else E g y p t will b e ruined b y H i s p o w e r . "
71
H e fell silent a t this statement a n d w o u l d not consider it a t a l l .
6 7 A 6 8
Lit. 'ran'; 'rose up'. A different reason from that of Ex. viii. 18 (P), where
6 9
they tried to bring forth gnats magically and failed. I.e. Pharaoh's command to
7 0
them was now rescinded. I.e. the flies are fed by the corpses of the dead.
7 1 7 2
There is considerable abbreviation here. Ex. viii. 20-23 (J) is passed over. So K.
The Fourth-Tenth Judgements 27
73
b o d y and the spirit to the l i v i n g . T h e governing of living h u m a n
beings is b y both soul a n d spirit; the governing of the d e a d is suf
ficiently done b y soul. Y o u s a y the eating of flesh is not permissible.
W e w a n t to slaughter a n d sacrifice cattle. Y o u worship animal forms,
b u t w e sacrifice animal flesh to our G o d . T h e r e is a considerable dif
ference between us. I t is not permissible for us to sacrifice a n y w h e r e
b u t in the desert. If w e were to sacrifice w h a t is abominable in the sight
of the E g y p t i a n s , t h e y w o u l d quickly stone us ( E x . viii. 2 6 ) . F o r a
period of three d a y s w e shall journey into the desert a n d sacrifice to
the L o r d , the G o d of our fathers." ( E x . viii. 2 7 . )
(Pharaoh said), " P r a y now to the L o r d a n d remove these flies w h i c h
cause me sore distress, so t h a t m y b o d y is w e a k " ( E x . viii. 2 8 ) . T h e y
said to him, " W e shall p r a y a n d remove them from y o u , b u t do not
deceive us as y o u usually d o " ( E x . viii. 29). Moses p r a y e d to the L o r d
( E x . viii. 30) and H e r e m o v e d the flies ( E x . viii. 3 1 ) , but Pharaoh
hardened his heart and he did not let the people go ( E x . viii. 3 2 ; T a r g . ) .
A s long as the judgements upon P h a r a o h were great, his attitude w a s
one of pride a n d continued stubbornness.
7 4
THE SIXTH JUDGEMENT
75
After this fifth judgement the p o w e r of the L o r d d e s t r o y e d their
cattle. A s long as his attitude w a s h a r d a n d presumptuous, judgement
w a s increased upon him. Moses testified to him, swearing to him t h a t
whenever he let the people go, further judgement w o u l d not come
his w a y .
And the Lord said to Moses and Aaron, "Take ashes from the kiln and
let Moses throw them towards heaven" ( E x . ix. 8 ; T a r g . ) . T h e great
prophet Moses took ashes of the kiln after t h a t a n d scattered them
upwards. T h e y became spreading ulcers, burning the bodies of living
76
people ( E x . ix. 1 0 ) . T h e n a great c u r s e appeared amongst all the
E g y p t i a n s . T h e y tasted the bitterness of death while t h e y y e t lived.
T h e i r bodies died while their spirits suffered.
T h e sorcerers were unable to oppose Moses, for t h e y were d u m -
founded because of the ulcers ( E x . ix. 1 1 ) , their flesh ulcerated, their
7 3 A
Obscure; so . The 'living', frequently fig. by this idiom; presumably the contrast
between body and 'speakers' is intended as a contrast between lifeless corpse (so a?SI ?)
7 4
and living (uttering) being. The plagues of cattle and boils—Ex. ix. 1-21—are
almost passed over. They are from J and P (J being specially abbreviated, it seems).
The plague of hail (beginning with E — E x . ix. 22 fi.) receives considerable attention.
7 5 1 7 8
There may be a verb missing before ^opn ?. K 'sickness'.
28 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I. §.8
tongue stuttering, their souls in torment, a n d their bodies fainting. B u t
P h a r a o h hardened his heart a n d w o u l d not release the people ( E x .
7 7
ix. 1 2 ) .
7 8
THE EIGHTH JUDGEMENT
And the Lord said to Moses, "Stretch forth your hand toward heaven,
that there may be hail in all the land of Egypt ( E x . ix. 2 2 ; T a r g . ) , killing
cattle a n d destroying all fruits.
That there may be hail in all the land of Egypt, uprooting roots a n d
stripping branches.
That there may be hail in all the land of Egypt, felling trees a n d
w a s t i n g crops ( E x . ix. 2 5 ) .
That there may be hail in all the land of Egypt, punishment for the
g u i l t y w h o do not believe in G o d .
7 9
THE NINTH JUDGEMENT
Then the Lord said to Moses, "Stretch out your hand over the land of
Egypt, that locusts may come up ( E x . x . 1 2 ; T a r g . ) , bringing severe
punishment upon the E g y p t i a n s , more severe t h a n the seven previous
80
judgements."
7 8 A A
" According to E x . ix. 12 God hardened the heart of Pharaoh. D , L The Seventh
7 8 a
Address. The whole J passage—Ex. ix. 13-21—is passed over. The J passages
7 9
here (Ex. ix. 23a, 24a) are not ref. to. The long J passage (x. 1 - 1 1 ) is passed
8 0
over and the commentary resumes at E (x. 12). There is confusion over the
number of plagues (cf. Book II, passim), depending on whether thefirstwas the serpents.
The Fourth-Tenth Judgements 29
8 6
THE TENTH JUDGEMENT
Then the Lord said to Moses, "Stretch out your hand toward heaven,
that there may be darkness ( E x . x . 2 1 ) ; throughout the l a n d of E g y p t . "
Moses did as his L o r d c o m m a n d e d him a n d stretched out his h a n d ,
a n d there c a m e intense darkness to the sight of the E g y p t i a n s . T h e y
s a w no light in the land for three d a y s , a n exceedingly bitter prison, a
prison of darkness ( E x . x . 2 2 ) .
87
A l l the f a t e d were imprisoned in it, a d a r k prison-house in w h i c h
no light w a s to be seen. A l l those imprisoned therein w e r e in a state of
confusion; b u t all the H e b r e w s h a d before them a light shining on
them, whereas the E g y p t i a n s w e r e as people fettered in iron behind
them ( E x . x. 2 3 ) .
Pharaoh m a d e haste to Moses the third d a y . H e s u m m o n e d Moses
a n d A a r o n ; he cried before them, not seeing them, a n d said, " O Moses,
open u p the prison in w h i c h I a m a prisoner, a n d let m e out of it, a n d
I will let y o u r people go out from E g y p t a t once." ( E x . x . 2 4 . ) T h e
prophet Moses opened the prison of darkness a n d let P h a r a o h a n d all
the assembly of the E g y p t i a n s go out of it.
W h e n morning came, the great prophet Moses stood before P h a r a o h
a n d said to him, "Release the people as y o u promised." P h a r a o h the
king answered w i t h great treachery, " L e a v e y o u r belongings behind,
and go, offer sacrifice! ( E x . x . 2 4 b . ) Moses said to h i m , " W e c a n n o t go
forth without our cattle, for w e m e a n to m a k e offerings from t h e m "
( E x . x. 2 5 - 6 ) . P h a r a o h hardened his heart a n d refused to let t h e m go
from his possession ( E x . x . 2 7 ) . H e rebuked Moses a n d said to h i m ,
" L e a v e me. Y o u are not to see m y face a g a i n ! If I see y o u a g a i n I shall
order y o u r execution" ( E x . x . 2 8 ) . Moses said to him, "As you say"
( E x . x. 2 9 ; T a r g . ) .
8 1 8 2 8 8
For itn. Or 'because of the darkness', "pap often = bap. So L . D 'future'.
8 4 8 5
Or, as Ex. x. 20 'the Lord hardened'. The J tradition (x. 16-19) is not
8 4 A 8 7
faithfully reproduced here. D The Tenth Address. Lit. 'sons of the dead',
i.e. 'potentially dead'.
30 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I . §§.8,9
8 9
§ 9. T H E E L E V E N T H JUDGEMENT
The Lord said to Moses, "Yet one plague more I will bring upon
Pharaoh and Egypt. Afterwards he will let you go ( E x . x i . 1 ; T a r g . ) .
A f t e r this tenth judgement, about midnight, m y glory will come d o w n
( E x . x i . 4) a n d s l a y all the firstborn in the land of E g y p t , of the first
born of P h a r a o h w h o w o u l d sit on Pharaoh's throne, a n d also the first
born of the m a i d s e r v a n t w h o is behind the mill, a n d the firstborn of
90
the cattle a n d the firstborn of the c a p t i v e s ( E x . x i . 5). T h e r e shall b e
heard a great c r y , such as h a s never been and never again will b e "
( E x . x i . 6).
Moses repeated w h a t w a s said to P h a r a o h the king, bearing witness
to it, so t h a t he might be free of him. " T h u s said the L o r d , the G o d of
the w o r l d , ' L e t the sons of my firstborn ( E x . iv. 2 2 ; T a r g . ) go, t h a t t h e y
m a y serve me. If y o u do not let them go, H e will kill y o u r firstborn son
a n d all the firstborn in y o u r land. All these your servants shall come
down to me a n d ask m e to leave, myself a n d all the people w h o follow
m e ( E x . x i . 8 ) , and after that I will go out (ibid. T a r g . ) .
T h e w o r d of the L o r d came, " L e t him b e ! H e will not listen though
m y wonders are m a n y (cf. E x . x i . 9). T h e time for his destruction has
d r a w n near." And the Lord hardened Pharaoh's heart, and he did not let
the people of Israel go out of his land ( E x . x i . 1 0 ; T a r g . ) .
The Lord said to Moses and to Aaron, after these wonders that had
gone before, "This month shall be for you the beginning of months
( E x . xii. 1 - 2 ; T a r g . ) , the end of affliction a n d the beginning of relief.
This month shall be for you the beginning of months, the inaugu
ration of f a v o u r a n d the conclusion of disfavour.
This month shall be for you the beginning of months, the end of
punishment a n d the beginning of rest.
This month shall be for you the beginning of months, the entrance of
good a n d the exit of evil.
8 8 8 9 A
This verse a later add., further expanded in L . D The Eleventh Address. In
Book I, seeing that the serpents constitute plague one, the firstborn counts as the
8 0
eleventh, but cf. also Book II, passim. Not mentioned in the text, i.e. in Ex. xi. 5,
but apparently from Ex. xii. 29.
The Eleventh Judgement 31
8 7 8 8 8 9 1 8 8
MSS ">SK. Or 'righteousness'. I.e. EL-SHADDAI, Gen. xvii. i. A
The Eleventh Judgement 33
T h e tenth d a y is for y o u a n d w h a t follows is for A a r o n . Y o u will start
a n d he will finish.
E l e a z a r is appointed to the succession. T o d a y he is glorious; like h i m
Phinehas is exalted. T h e d a y w h i c h is for him, in the blessedness of
w h i c h w a s his father—behold, ten a n d three together c r o w n e d w i t h
1 0 1
perfection: behold, ten a n d three c r o w n e d w i t h m i g h t !
L e t the d a y come safely on w h i c h is the deliverance, for it is c r o w n e d
w i t h glory a n d contains the Blessing.
L e t the d a y come safely on w h i c h is the deliverance, for truth is a b o u t
1 0 2
to b e manifested in the w o r l d .
L e t the d a y come safely, whose evening w a s God's, w h o s e d a y w a s
Israel's—as H e said: It was a night (of w a t c h i n g ) by the Lord ( E x . xii. 4 2 ;
T a r g . ) . T h r e e deeds in the night, while H e w r o u g h t the exodus—as H e
said, About midnight I will go forth in the midst of the land of Egypt
1 0 3
( E x . xi. 4 ; T a r g . ) . H e will reveal w h a t H e s a i d — W h e n I see the blood
( E x . xii. 1 3 ; T a r g . ) .
R e a d where it is written, / will pass (ibid.) over the houses of m y
beloved and will s l a y the firstborn of m y enemies. I will m a k e all their
gods and idols collapse."
T h i s w a s the doing of the G o d of gods t h a t n i g h t ! A s the L o r d said,
" T h e morning of it is for H i s people." A s H e said, "This day shall be
for you a memorial day ( E x . xii. 1 4 ; T a r g . ) — i t will never be c h a n g e d !
L e t the T a h e b come safely a n d clear a w a y the darkness w h i c h h a s
1 0 4
become great in the w o r l d !
105
L e t the T a h e b come safely a n d s c a t t e r the enemies w h o h a v e
provoked G o d !
106
L e t the T a h e b come safely and sacrifice a true offering before B e t h e l .
L e t the T a h e b come safely, t h a t the L o r d m a y h a v e p i t y a n d
107
reveal H i s F a v o u r , a n d t h a t Israel m a y sacrifice in the e v e n i n g .
108
L e t the T a h e b come safely and separate the c h o s e n from the
108
rejected, and let this affliction be turned into relief!
T h e d a y w h i c h H e m a d e the fourteenth is the end
109
of one affair a n d the beginning of a n o t h e r .
T h u s H e said to them, " I n the evening t h e y shall sacrifice one sacri
110
fice equivalent to f o u r — i n the evening, a t the setting of the sun,
1 0 1
'Ten' ref. to the Ten Words (Decalogue) and Tenth Day, 'Three' to the three
1 0 2
Righteous patriarchs and the three related first priests of Israel. D nam (hence
A A 1 0 3
D , L = nm) for L i s m , q. 1. Targ. here as S.P., var. from M.T.
1 0 4
["nsn Tina]. For the teaching of Marqah about the Taheb, see Book II, § 9 & IV
1 0 5 1 0 6
§ 12. = -i^i (root -na). The Sams, have held ever since that the Taheb
(Restorer) will come to Mount Gerizim ( = Bethel), re-establish true worship and
1 0 7 1 0 8
sacrifice, and recover the Temple vessels. As Ex. xii. 6b. Act. ptcs; 1. with
A 1 0 9 1 1 0
pass. ptcs. I.e. the end of servitude and beginning of freedom. Ref.
to the four categories listed ff.
34 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I. §.9
111
j u s t a s it s e t s — a sacrifice of thanksgiving for the deliverance of the
ancestors: a sacrifice of peace offerings for the safe-keeping of the first
b o r n : a sin offering, the blood of w h i c h is sprinkled in the evening:
Israel shall sacrifice a t the siege a n d conquest of a c i t y — a t the siege of
a c i t y , a distressing m a t t e r ; a t the conquest of a c i t y , a joyful m a t t e r !
G r e a t is our G o d w h o h a s thus glorified us
a n d called the n a m e of this offering Passover.
A s H e said, "It is the Lord's passover, for He passed over . . . Israel"
( E x . xii. 2 7 ; T a r g . ) . H e created it b y H i s m i g h t a n d , as H e said, " I n the
e v e n i n g (the Lord's) passover" ( L e v . xxiii. 5), there shall be no change
in it ever. " N o w o r k is t o b e done on t h a t d a y " (cf. E x . xii. 1 6 ) a n d
" T h e remainder of it till t h e morning" ( E x . xii. 1 0 ) , a n d " W i t h fire it
shall be b u r n t " (cf. E x . xii. 1 0 ) . " T h e first d a y a holy assembly a n d the
1 1 2
seventh d a y a h o l y a s s e m b l y — n o w o r k is to b e done ( E x . xii. 1 6 ) —
keeping its holiness; this is the glorifying of the Passover. W e r e it not
for Passover, nothing w o u l d h a v e been magnified, no holiness revealed,
n o rest m a d e possible.
1 1 2
Explanation of the phrase 'between the evenings' in Ex. xii, 6b. Root n^B-
The Eleventh Judgement 35
113
y o u r generations. Y o u will perform it as a p i l g r i m a g e t o the L o r d
a l w a y s ( E x . xii. 1 4 ) . L e t there b e seen during it no leavened b r e a d
( E x . xiii. 7 ) . Seven days you shall eat unleavened bread ( E x . xii. 1 5 ;
T a r g . ) ; anyone w h o eats a n y t h i n g fermented during t h e m is to b e c u t
off. U n h a p p y is he w h o ever accepts leavened bread, from the first d a y
u p to the seventh (of the F e s t i v a l ) , a m o n g all y o u r dwellings ( E x . xii.
20). U n l e a v e n e d b r e a d y o u shall eat ( E x . xii. 1 5 ) ; in this manner you
shall eat the P a s s o v e r : your loins girded, your sandals on your feet, and
your staff in your hands ( E x . xii. 1 1 ; T a r g . ) .
114
After that m y r e g e n t will descend a n d kill t h e firstborn of the
E g y p t i a n s — m a n a n d beast—while y o u set forth w i t h t r i u m p h , led b y
the pillar of cloud a n d of fire, provisioned w i t h all good a n d f a v o u r ,
with the wealth of the E g y p t i a n s — s i l v e r a n d gold a n d raiment. Y o u
will be enriched w i t h t h e m a n d w i t h multiple bounties, while all the
E g y p t i a n s will be deprived of wealth, of silver a n d gold a n d a p p a r e l . "
T h e great prophet Moses learned the P a s s o v e r
L a w a n d w e n t a n d t a u g h t it to the whole con
gregation.
Then Moses called all the elders of Israel ( E x . xii. 2 1 ; T a r g . ) , t h a t
he should teach t h e m the P a s s o v e r L a w .
Then Moses called all the elders of Israel, t h a t t h e y should lead
forth the sheep a n d slaughter as h a d been c o m m a n d e d .
Then Moses called all the elders of Israel, t h a t t h e y should declare
to the congregation the first festival.
Then Moses called all the elders of Israel, to tell the whole people
Select for yourselves ( E x . xii. 2 1 ; T a r g . ) .
T h e E l d e r s called a n d m a d e proclamation among the congregation,
" B r i n g out the sheep w h i c h are placed in the fold a n d prepare the
sacrifice, for the hour for it has come n e a r ; the coming of the D e s t r o y e r
b y night is made ready. Take a bunch of hyssop and dip it in the blood
which is in the basin . . . . and the two doorposts ( E x . xii. 2 2 - 2 3 ; T a r g . ) ,
for the Destroyer will descend a n d destroy e v e r y house on w h i c h there
is no blood token."
Then the people of Israel went and did so ( E x . xii. 2 8 ; T a r g . ) . Y o u n g
men prepared to go obediently to their schoolhouse.
Then the people of Israel went and did so, the stars of A b r a h a m
a r r a y e d in the firmament.
Then the people of Israel went and did so, the crop of I s a a c heaped
u p on the threshing-floor.
Then the people of Israel went and did so, the oaks of J a c o b planted
in the Garden.
1 1 8
That the major Festivals were actually pilgrimages is evidenced from the Sam.
Liturgy for Succoth (C. Vol. II). Details have been worked out in the Ph. D. Dissertation
1 1 4
of L. C. Green, University of Leeds, 1958. L 'glory'.
36 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I- § 9
As the Lord had commanded Moses and Aaron, so they did. They
bowed their heads and worshipped ( E x . xii. 2 8 , 2 7 ; T a r g . ) .
1 1 5
Suggesting that the death of the firstborn was due to some form of disease.
1 1 8 A 1 1 7
Root ao)? s J * ; descriptive of the huge stone deities of Egypt. ? Cf.
A 1 1 8
Gen. x. 7. j i i l seems to be translating the root sao. See n. 132 of text.
1 1 9
Lit. 'ugly trees', but 'unfruitful' or 'barren' because their branches had been cut
1 2 0 A 1 2 1
off to provide platforms for military purposes. 'devoted'. I.e. 'has seen
the blood on the doorposts', or 1. Pa.
I. §§-9.io T h e Beginning of the E x o d u s 37
There was a great cry in the houses of all the E g y p t i a n s , "Houses
are destroyed a n d firstborn slain," for there was not a house where
one was not dead (ibid.)—a long, prolonged c r y !
T h e H a m i t e s were under great a n d harsh w r a t h , while the Semites
were in great j o y .
T h e firstborn of H a m were slain, while the firstborn of Israel were
sanctified on the other h a n d .
T h e garden of H a m w a s destroyed b y the w r a t h , while the garden
of S h e m w a s well looked after.
H a m ' s god w a s felled in the judgement, while S h e m ' s god w a s
being magnified a n d exalted.
1 2 2
T h e D a g a n of H a m b e c a m e barren of fruit, w h i l e the D a g a n of
S h e m became fertile.
T h e kingdom of H a m c a m e then to a n end, w h i l e the kingdom of
S h e m then began.
For there was not a house where one was not dead (ibid.); light w a s
w i t h d r a w n from them a n d darkness cast upon them.
123
For there was not a house where one was not dead; t h e e n t r a n c e to
the gate of w r a t h w a s opened for them.
For there was not a house where one was not dead; the disasters t h a t
befell Sodom befell them.
§ 10. B E G I N N I N G O F T H E E X O D U S
P H A R A O H L E T S I S R A E L GO
W h e n all the E g y p t i a n s found their firstborn slain, t h e y w e n t in a
b o d y to P h a r a o h the king, and cried out before h i m in great anguish;
t h e y said to him, " L e t this people g o . " N o w Moses a n d A a r o n w e r e
outside p r a y i n g , standing in intercession before their G o d . W h e n t h e y
turned round t h e y s a w the messengers hastily sent to t h e m b y P h a r a o h .
( T h e y accompanied the messengers to Pharaoh.) Moses a n d A a r o n
124
stood before h i m ; his domination w a s s u b d u e d a n d his burdens re
duced w h e n t h e y entered within the g a t e ! T h e light from their a p
pearance filled his palace. P h a r a o h said t o t h e m in a c o w e d manner,
"Go forth from among my people ( E x . xii. 3 1 ; T a r g . ) , y o u a n d all y o u r
congregation as quickly as possible." T h e prophets Moses a n d A a r o n ,
when P h a r a o h told t h e m 'Go forth from among my people,' w e n t pro
claiming to the assembly of Israel, "Arise, set forth in safety. H e h a s
not a longsuffering spirit." T h e E g y p t i a n s w e r e g r e a t l y incensed against
them a t the speed of their release from the land. T h e Israelites seized
from t h e m e v e r y t h i n g t h e y desired, and set forth clad in it! ( E x . xii. 3 5 . )
1 2 2 1 2 3
General term for the god of fertility. Lit. 'treading': cf. Bibl. Heb. root and
A 1 2 4 A
Syr. JLaJj. but ji. 'his rage subsided'.
38 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I. §.io
125
A n exceedingly harsh pillage of burning a n d scattering, i n t e r e s t
on w h i c h still remains.
A n exceedingly harsh pillage, w h i c h deprived the lender and
b r o u g h t the downfall of the plunderer.
A n exceedingly harsh pillage for the plunderer a n d the lender alike.
A n exceedingly harsh pillage w h i c h brought emptiness to the
abode of the lender.
1 2 6
A n exceedingly harsh pillage for the lender—a d e b t w h i c h is not
w i p e d out!
F r o m it c a m e the deprivation of the E g y p t i a n s ; from i t also c a m e
the descent of Israel a n d the denudation of the E g y p t i a n s . I t w a s said
concerning the demander, " H e entrusted debts t o them. Cursed is this
127
pillage for ever w h i c h renews upon us an ineffaceable w r o n g . "
START OF T H E JOURNEY
And the people of Israel journeyed from Rameses to Succoth ( E x . xii. 37;
T a r g . ) , t h e cloud a b o v e them, the fire before t h e m — s i x hundred
thousand, apparelled in humility, goodness a n d grace supporting them
there. Succoth w a s situated on a h i g h w a y , a place to w h i c h all t r a v
ellers w e n t .
T h e y were graceful, A b r a h a m ' s stars, a n d brightly shining, Sarah's
offspring.
128
C r o w n e d were Isaac's y o u n g men, g a r l a n d e d were Rachel's
young.
Beautiful w e r e J a c o b ' s cypresses, a r r a y e d L e a h ' s ranks.
I n Rameses t h e y m a d e sacrifice a n d t h e y j o u r n e y e d to S u c c o t h .
T h e y sought to leave it, but were unable. T h e pillar of cloud a n d of fire
h a d stopped in front of them, so t h a t t h e y could not get a w a y from the
outskirts of Succoth. Moses a n d A a r o n were w a t c h i n g afraid, a n d all
1 3 4 1 3 5 1 A 1 3 6 A
'Holy' rare in this connection. = P S I S O ? , but ^,<s,i\. So .
40 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to t h e E x o d u s I. §.io
the congregation w e r e in consternation, wondering w h a t w a s the mean
ing of this strange m a t t e r . Moses said to A a r o n , " I believe some vile
deed h a s been done in the congregation."
" L e t us call the E l d e r s , " t h e y said to one another, " T h a t w e m a y
enquire into this happening." T h e E l d e r s c a m e to Moses a n d A a r o n ,
1 3 7
their minds full of alarm. (Moses said to t h e m ) " G o in peace, O
E l d e r s of the congregation, a n d enquire of e v e r y tribe w h a t is the
meaning of this strange event. I do not believe t h a t sorcerers are able
1 3 8
w i t h their sorcery t o spellbind the sons of the O a t h . T h i s is but some
thing w e do not y e t understand. Nonetheless the t r u t h is n e a r ; it will
b e revealed in good t i m e . "
T h e E l d e r s w e n t off separately among the congregation and began
to question e v e r y single tribe. W h e n t h e y shouted t o the tribe of A s h e r ,
1 3 9
Serah c a m e out t o t h e m a t once (and said), " Y o u h a v e (done)
nothing wrong. I shall explain to y o u w h a t the meaning of this strange
event is."
T h e y p u t their trust in her then a n d brought her t o the great prophet
Moses. S h e stood before h i m — a n d he w a s like the moon in its ful
ness—and she said, "Greetings to y o u , Moses. O most glorious of men,
hear from m e about this m a t t e r about w h i c h y o u enquire."
140 1 4 1
Praise to t h o s e w h o illumine the b l i n d !
1 4 2
" Y o u w o u l d h a v e forgotten h i m , h a d not the pillar of cloud and
the pillar of fire stopped still. Y o u w o u l d h a v e gone forth a n d he w o u l d
h a v e been left behind in E g y p t . I remember the d a y on w h i c h he died,
w h e n he bound all the people b y oath to go u p w i t h their leaders from
here."
T h e great prophet Moses said to her, "Blessed are y o u , Serah, most
enlightened of w o m e n . F r o m t o d a y o n w a r d s y o u r greatness will be
recounted!"
Declaration w a s m a d e among the congregation and they were told,
" J o s e p h is going t o l e a v e here w i t h u s . "
Serah w e n t a w a y , the whole tribe of E p h r a i n round about her. Moses
a n d A a r o n followed them, till t h e y reached the place where he w a s
buried. S h e stopped there a n d t h e y uncovered the a r k a n d lifted it u p
there a n d then. S e r a h left Moses a n d A a r o n . T h e great prophet Moses
opened the a r k w i t h his right h a n d . Prostrating himself on it, he kissed
143
it. H e w e p t a n d b e g a n at t h a t v e r y m o m e n t to e u l o g i z e him. H e said,
" Y o u r spirit is pleasing, O most honoured of the household of his
father."
A l l the congregation stood eulogizing h i m and saying, " Y o u r spirit
is pleasing, O J o s e p h , patron of freedom." T h e great prophet Moses
1 8 7 1 8 8 1 8 9 1 1 0 A
So K add. I.e. Children of Jacob. Gen. xlvi. 17. 1. r-n^K as pVnx
i a 1 1 2 A
(ui* — K's m n ) . So A; root a a s 'be darkened". Joseph. **» So . The
Pa. (as Arabic Form II) specially used for intensified and extended purposes.
I. §§.io,n T h e Pursuit and Defeat of the E g y p t i a n s 41
raised his voice a n d said to him, " O J o s e p h , y o u r spirit k n o w s t h a t y o u
will be borne b y the h a n d s of m e a n d six hundred thousand w h o extol
you. T h e cloud and the fire will lead the w a y in front of y o u , a n d y o u r
descendants are become y o u r bearers. A f t e r the passing of a hundred
and forty y e a r s buried in the land of E g y p t — n o w after all these y e a r s
y o u are going to ascend to the l a n d w h i c h w a s apportioned to y o u .
1 4 4
Y o u r spirit is pleasing, 0 F r u i t f u l B o u g h , O J o s e p h the king w h o
w a s vested w i t h freedom, for w h o m w a s w r o u g h t m i g h t y a n d magnifi
cent greatness, as well as glory a n d praise both during y o u r life a n d
after y o u r death. I n y o u r lifetime y o u w e r e praised w i t h salutations,
and the sons of t w o w i v e s m a d e obeisance to y o u . A f t e r y o u r death y o u
are praised even more t h a n then."
W h e n the great prophet Moses stopped eulogizing h i m , h e said to
the house of E p h r a i m , " Y o u will c a r r y h i m . "
J o s h u a w e n t in front a n d carried him. H e called out a n d said, " Y o u r
spirit is pleasing, O father, most honoured of his father's house." A s
soon as he w a s lifted u p b y his children the cloud a n d the fire w e n t
before them.
§ 11. PURSUIT A N D D E F E A T OF T H E E G Y P T I A N S
And they moved on from Succoth, and encamped at Etham, on the edge
of the wilderness ( E x . xiii. 2 0 ; T a r g . ) . On t h a t d a y G o d called to Moses,
146
"Prepare the people before P i h a h i r o t h , between Migdol a n d the sea,
1 4 6
in front of B a a l - Z e p h o n . 1 will fight for t h e m there w i t h great m e r c y ,
for I desire to turn the heart of P h a r a o h against them, so t h a t he will
pursue after them a n d his shame will be brought about. I k n o w t h a t
h e has been told in E g y p t , ' They are entangled in the land; the wilderness
has shut them in ( E x . x i v . 3 ; T a r g . ) . Come, pursue after them, t h a t w e
m a y bring them b a c k to serve u s . ' "
W h e n the E g y p t i a n s h a d finished b u r y i n g their children, t h e y roused
themselves from the c o m a of their grief. T h e y w e n t to P h a r a o h the
king a n d said to him, "What is this we have done, that we have let Israel
go? ( E x . x i v . 5; T a r g . ) . Come, prepare y o u r chariots a n d let u s all
pursue w i t h y o u , t h a t w e m a y restore t h e m to our service. T h e y are
our servants, as t h e y w e r e our fathers' before us. W h y d i d w e allow
them to leave E g y p t ? L e t us also get b a c k the goods t h e y h a v e w i t h
them, w h i c h t h e y plundered from us. T h e y h a v e left u s e m p t y -
handed!"
T h e y w e n t forth m a k i n g proclamation throughout the l a n d of
E g y p t . T h o s e entering into battle gathered together. P h a r a o h ^ m a d e
r e a d y his chariots; he took his people w i t h h i m ( E x . x i v . 6 ) , his heart
1 M 1 4 5 1 4 0
Gen. xlix. 22. A'Fam al-Giza*. A 'idol of Z.\
4 2 Book I F r o m the Call of Moses to the E x o d u s I. § "
1 4 7
bold n o w t h a t it h a d returned to its former s t a t e . Six hundred picked
chariots ( E x . x i v . 7; T a r g . ) , supplied for h i m for w a r — a l l the chariots
148
of the E g y p t i a n s a n d o f f i c e r s o v e r t h e m all. T h e y pursued after
Israel a n d c a u g h t u p w i t h t h e m w h e n t h e y w e r e encamped a t the R e d
S e a ( E x . x i v . 9). P h a r a o h the king stopped opposite B a a l - Z e p h o n and
1 4 9
offered there a sacrifice to i t , for B a a l - Z e p h o n w a s one of the gods
in w h i c h he trusted.
G r e a t w a s the terror in w h i c h the Israelites w e r e , terror lest t h e y
m i g h t h a v e to return to E g y p t . T h e y said to Moses in great fear,
" K n o w t h a t y o u are the murderer of Israel. H o w are w e to act ? W h a t
c a n w e possibly plan to do ? T h e e n e m y are behind us a n d the sea is in
150
front of us. Is not this what we said to you in Egypt, 'Let us alone and
let us serve the Egyptians!' ( E x . x i v . 1 2 ; T a r g . ) . What have you done to
us, in bringing us out of Egypt? ( E x . x i v . 1 1 ; T a r g . ) W e shall all be
killed in a flash."
And Moses said to the people, "Fear not. Stand firm. You shall never see
the Egyptians! And see the salvation of the Lord. The Lord will fight for
1 5 1
you, and you have only to be still ( E x . x i v . 1 3 - 1 4 ; T a r g . ) .
DIVIDING OF T H E R E D S E A
A f t e r t h a t Moses received c o m m a n d from the L o r d of the world, and
h e struck the sea w i t h his rod. W h e n the R e d S e a opened before them,
t h e y crossed over, w i t h the cloud a n d the glory leading them ( E x . x i v .
21-22).
E x a l t e d these f a v o u r e d y o u n g men
before w h o m the sea w a s dried u p !
T h e y w a l k e d in it a n d the E g y p t i a n s entered in after them, b u t they
w e r e engulfed a n d did n o t escape from the sea.
Observe the difference between the t w o w h o entered!
T h e great prophet Moses entered a n d P h a r a o h king of E g y p t
entered.
Moses entered a n d the g l o r y w a s in front of him magnifying him.
P h a r a o h entered a n d the D e s t r o y e r w a s before h i m to destroy him.
Moses entered a n d the D i v i n e One w a s glorifying him.
P h a r a o h entered a n d the D i v i n e One w a s w r e a k i n g vengeance on
him.
1 5 2
Moses entered a n d the angels ministered to h i m .
P h a r a o h entered a n d the angels punished him.
N o n e has arisen like Moses a n d none will ever arise!
1 4 7 1 4 8 A
mnnsa lit. 'on its return'. prVn, cf. Ex. xiv. 7. j|^5, generals, leaders.
1 4 9 1 6 0
Not 'drew near to it' as E x . xiv. 10 is usually translated. Root 001 = root
1 5 1
ODp (cf. Don) = Heb. root yxp, and so K's yp. Var. order, probably due to
1 5 2
Marqah's arrangement. Cf. Matt. iv. 1 1 .
I. §.II T h e P u r s u i t a n d D e f e a t of the E g y p t i a n s 43
T E N T I M E S the E g y p t i a n s w e r e slain in the sea, because t h e y did
not believe in the ten miracles.
163
Pharaoh's chariots and his host he cast into the sea ( E x . x v . 4;
T a r g . ) . T h e i r blood w a s shed in it, j u s t a s in t h e r i v e r of E g y p t .
16
The depths * cover them, j u s t as t h e frogs c o v e r e d them.
They went down into the depths like a stone ( E x . x v . 5; T a r g . ) , j u s t a s
the g n a t s sank into their flesh.
Thou sendest forth thy fury, it consumes them like stubble ( E x . x v . 7;
T a r g . ) , j u s t as the flies a t e their bodies.
At the blast of thy nostrils the waters piled up ( E x . x v . 8; T a r g . ) , j u s t
as the p o w e r of the L o r d p l a g u e d their cattle.
The floods stood up in a heap (ibid.), j u s t as t h e y stood u p during t h e
plague of boils.
166
The depths congealed in the heart of the sea (ibid.), j u s t as t h e hail
froze them in the field.
Thou didst blow with thy wind, the sea covered them ( E x . x v . 1 0 ;
T a r g . ) , j u s t as the cloud of locusts covered them.
They sank as lead in the mighty waters ( E x . x v . 1 0 ; Targ.), just as
t h e y sank into t h e g l o o m y darkness.
Thou didst stretch out thy right hand; the earth swallowed them ( E x . x v .
1 2 ; T a r g . ) , j u s t as the D e s t r o y e r s w a l l o w e d u p t h e spirits of their
firstborn.
T E N T I M E S t h e y disbelieved in E g y p t a n d ten times t h e y w e r e
slain in the sea, w h i l e Israel w e n t forth victoriously, passing through
it on d r y land.
156
T h e great prophet Moses a n d all Israel w i t h h i m p r a i s e d t h e G o d
of gods, the L o r d of all g r e a t ones ( E x . x v . 1 ) , " T h o u a r t to b e glorified
a n d magnified, O doer of wonders, w h o dost endure a n d last for e v e r . "
Blessed is our G o d for ever. T h e r e is o n l y
one G o d ! Blessed is H i s n a m e for e v e r !
1 5 8
'JIIT, unknown. May be connected with Syr. ^ , ^ J t , or Jew Targ. Vno, but
A
neither meaning suits. j>-. Jew. Targ. x ^ n o (Greek a&pyahx;, place in a chariot
where the whip is kept: Lat. sarraculum) may be related to the form here, but perhaps
1 6 4
coincidentally. Lit. 'heap' of water; cf. Bibl. Heb. root nax as in Gen. xii. 36.
A 1 6 5 A 1 6 4
root ^ 'conceal'. For lxop (Ex. xv. 8); 'froze'. All MSS TB?K: cf.
b
Sanhedrin a i -
BOOK n
MOSES T H E SAVIOUR OF I S R A E L
Also by Marqah, the Favour of the Lord be upon him!
§ i. T H E W O N D E R F U L C R E A T I O N O F M A N
1
T h e life of the w o r l d is in the deep w a t e r s of a pleasant w a t e r - s p r i n g .
L e t us stand with perception to drink of its w a t e r s . W e are thirsty for
2
the w a t e r s of life ; m i g h t y rivers t h e y are before us.
Blessed be the G o d w h o brought into existence the different kinds
of creatures for the sake of m a n .
Glorious is the F o r m in the likeness of
3
the A n g e l s !
4
T h e F o r m of the mind is not the F o r m of the material b o d y . H e
divided the various kinds of living creatures into four sorts, the first
5
t h r e e for the sake of the fourth. H e m a d e the b o d y of the last w i t h its
wisdom implanted, so t h a t the b o d y should b e c a p a b l e of being illu
mined b y the mind. T h u s not one (of the other three) c a n w i t h s t a n d a
man. H e g a v e a perfect l a w t o H i s servants to provide life a n d length
of d a y s , for b y the observing of it is the soul disposed, a n d according to
the state of the soul is the b o d y disposed. A s the stature of a m a n lies
with the soul, so the stature of the soul lies w i t h the l a w , For that man
does not live by bread alone, but that man lives by everything that proceeds
6
out of the mouth of the Lord (Deut. viii. 3 ) .
§ 2. T H E W O N D E R F U L D E L I V E R A N C E
E v e r commemorate well the great prophet Moses, w h o opened for us
the Garden of E d e n of the l a w , w h e n for its sake he freed the tribes of
J a c o b , the sun of I s a a c , the stars of A b r a h a m , w h o underwent misery
during the third part—one hundred a n d forty y e a r s — o f four hundred
years, for four hundred y e a r s is their calculation. B u t a t the end of the
period t h e y were to go forth a s kings!
W h e n t h e y realized t h a t the y e a r s were over, t h e y sighed a n d cried
out, seeking relief ( E x . ii. 2 3 ) , and God remembered his covenant with
1
Or 'everlasting life is at the borders (reading •>mnn with K) of Eden's waterspring.'
2 8 A
Cf. John iv. 14; Rev. xxi. 6, xxii. I, 17. So . For nviVx = D'asVa, v. Pss.viii.6
(LXX), lxxxii. 1, cxxxviii. 1; Heb. i. 6, ii. 7, 9. For the connection between the ideology
of Hebrews with that of Marqah, v. R. J . F. Trotter, Did the Samaritans of the Fourth
Century know the Epistle to the Hebrews? Leed University Oriental Society, Monograph
1 A 5
Series no. 1, 1961. J J , the body in the quantitative and extensive sense. I.e.
A
beasts, birds, fish; man is the fourth species. D seems to represent a different textual
8
tradition; it 1. 'the divisions of the four' instead of 'the fourth'. Quoted in Matt.iv.4.
4 8 Book I I Moses the S a v i o u r of Israel n. §§.2, 3
Abraham, with Isaac, and with Jacob ( E x . ii. 2 4 ) . Similarly the son of
7
L a m e c h cried out after the passing of one hundred a n d fifty d a y s , and
8
G o d remembered h i m , the eighty y e a r o l d , in H i s perfect intellect and
H i s perfect knowledge.
9
T h e r e are three u l t i m a t e s in his prophethood w h i c h were revealed:
the glorious n a m e of the L o r d ; the m i r a c l e ; the role of priest.
10
T H R E E T I M E S t h e y believed in the L o r d a n d in M o s e s , but they
w e r e u n w o r t h y in their belief.
T h e F I R S T : w h e n he performed three wonders in E g y p t in the
sight of t h e m all, t h e y believed, b u t did not remain steadfast. N o , t h e y
apostasized a n d said (to Moses a n d A a r o n ) , "The Lord look upon you
1 1
and judge." ( E x . v . 2 1 ) .
T h e S E C O N D : w h e n t h e y beheld the wonders w h i c h he did in
E g y p t , t h e y did not believe, b u t apostasized whole-heartedly and said,
"You have taken us away to die in the wilderness" ( E x . x i v . 1 1 ) .
T h e T H I R D : t h e y s a w more wonders in the R e d S e a than t h e y h a d
e v e r seen, the like of w h i c h h a d never been produced.
G r e a t a r e the holy congregation w h o w e n t forth from the iron fur
nace, guided b y the righteous prophet w i t h m i g h t y wonders to keep
the perfect l a w , w h i c h descended from the holy habitation.
§.3 § 3. T H E P A R T P L A Y E D B Y T H E E L E M E N T S
T h e elements of the w o r l d n u m b e r four. T h e y served the congre
gation of the L o r d from the d a y t h a t Moses, upon him be peace, came
t o the M o u n t of G o d , Mount H o r e b , w h e n the L o r d sent him with
spectacular w o n d e r s — v e n g e a n c e on the E g y p t i a n s a n d deliverance for
t h e hosts of the L o r d .
T h r e e occasions clearly manifested the issue of the m i g h t y F I R E
from the L o r d out of heaven, to serve the children of H i s servants from
H o r e b as far as the Desert of S h u r . W I N D ten times served the fa
12
v o u r e d tribes a n d t h w a r t e d their enemies, until t h e y h a d gone f o r t h
into the R e d S e a . W A T E R fourteen times served t h e m as far as the
Desert of S h u r . E A R T H also served t h e m — s i x times.
' Ref. to Noah; cf. Gen. viii. i, 3. The tradition of Noah crying out after 150 days is
not biblical. Perhaps the comparison here is based on (or merely similar to) Luke
xvii. 26, where 'Son of Man' (of Christ) becomes in Sam. belief 'The man of God' (of
8 9 A
Moses). K, L add. 'who prophesied, (Moses—so L) the son of Amram.' ouly:
1 0
K mniKa perhaps synonymous with ninths for the original m^S as here. Belief
1 1
in God and in Moses represents the first two tenets of the Sam. Creed. Part S.P.,
part Targ. It is not known why Marqah sometimes quotes partly from the Heb. and
partly from the Targ. It is probable that the Heb. words (which seem always to precede
1 2
the Aram.) were that part of a verse that one would cite in short. So K.
II. §. 3 T h e p a r t p l a y e d b y the E l e m e n t s 49
A l l these elements recognized t h e m w i t h understanding, differen
tiating between friends a n d foes. A l l the s e r v a n t s of the L o r d rejoice
a t the w o r k s of G o d ,
F o r the L o r d is greater t h a n all the gods.
13
T h e elements t h i r t y t h r e e times helped friends a n d t h w a r t e d foes.
T H E F I R E of the G l o r y w h i c h appeared t o Moses in the bush in
order to deliver the tribes, a n d the F I R E of the hail w h i c h flashed
14
continually t h e r e — m e r c y for the H e b r e w s a n d vengeance for the
E g y p t i a n s . T h e F I R E w h i c h appeared a m o n g the w a v e s of the R e d
Sea and consumed the enemies of G o d a n d of Israel.
These are the three occasions w h e n the F I R E of the L o r d s e r v e d the
servants of the L o r d G o d .
A s for the W I N D w h i c h served ten times, let those w i t h under
standing hearken to the explanation of it.
The first bore m a n y w i n g e d creatures to crush the enemies of G o d b y
means of the infliction of the flies ( E x . viii. 2 4 ) .
The second, the destructive w i n d t h a t brought a serious p l a g u e on the
cattle of the E g y p t i a n s ( E x . i x . 6).
The third spread the boils from Moses' h a n d throughout the l a n d of
E g y p t ( E x . ix. 1 0 ) .
The fourth bore the locusts a n d deposited t h e m in all E g y p t ' s borders,
so t h a t t h e y ate w h a t the hail h a d left ( E x . x . 1 5 ) .
The fifth w a s a v e r y strong w e s t w i n d t h a t bore the locusts a n d shook
15
t h e m off into the R e d S e a ( E x . x . 1 9 ) .
The sixth brought darkness to the sight of the E g y p t i a n s , so t h a t for
three d a y s no one could stand in his place ( E x . x . 2 3 ) .
The seventh; the L o r d d r o v e the sea f o r w a r d w i t h an east w i n d all
night and m a d e the sea into d r y land ( E x . x i v . 2 1 ) .
The eighth; b y the blast of H i s nostrils the w a t e r s piled u p ( E x . x v . 8)
a n d the w i n d became like columns for them.
The ninth restored the sea to its normal state ( E x . x i v . 2 7 ) , a n d m a d e
1 6
it c o m p a c t a n d loosed i t both for death a n d safety.
The tenth; H e blew w i t h H i s glorious w i n d ; the sea covered t h e m
( E x . x v . 1 0 ) after the deliverance of H i s servants.
Greatness is Thine, O L o r d w h o worketh wonders. W h o can do the
like of T h y deeds and like T h y m i g h t y a c t s ?
2 0 A 2 1 2 2
iraon ( Jji*), root aiB. Cf. Syr. and cf. Bibl. Heb. Deut. xii. 5. So
2 8 2 4 A 2 6
R.S.V. Ex. xiv. 25. I.e. Pharaoh's. As Jew. Targ. 'entered'. Root m i ;
SOA^.
52 Book I I Moses the S a v i o u r of Israel n. §§.3,4
§ 4. M O S E S A N D P H A R A O H
2 7
2
» MSS y>?n for y>?K. Lit. 'brought together'.
H . §§4-5 Moses a n d the S e a 53
A s for his estate, h o w can it exist in the w o r l d ? W o e to P h a r a o h the
evildoer, for w h a t is to be done to h i m b y the great prophet Moses!
28
Moses the M a n of G o d said to him, " W h e r e are the a s t r o l o g e r s ?
L e t t h e m come a n d see me now—see h o w I a m going to destroy y o u a t
m y L o r d ' s command. W h a t did t h e y s a y to y o u ? T h a t I w o u l d be
d e s t r o y e d b y t h e m in the sea b y reason of their superiority ? T o d a y
t h e y shall see w h o will do the destroying in the sea. T h e y shall ascer
tain t h a t it is our L o r d w h o is superior! G o , sinner, a n d prepare y o u r
self, for w e shall see the r e w a r d of all y o u r doings. O u r L o r d w i l l
destroy y o u w i t h manifold punishments. If the astrologers s a y to y o u
that I a m the one w h o will be destroyed in the sea, m y L o r d h a s in
structed m e that y o u are the one w h o will perish in it, a n d y o u will
find out w h i c h statement is true, t h a t of the astrologers or t h a t of
our L o r d . "
§ 5. M O S E S A N D T H E S E A §.5
L e t us consider the sea a n d listen to it a s it speaks. " F a r be it from
2 9
m e to do a n y t h i n g to provoke the T r u e One! I w a s not created to be
rebellious or contentious, b u t to be subservient to the c o m m a n d of the
T r u e One."
30
T h e great prophet Moses said to the sea, " B e s t i l l , for y o u will b e
come a judge, to judge rightly." I t w a s a s though the sea w a s s a y i n g
to him with deference, " W h a t y o u c o m m a n d m e I cannot disobey, for
y o u h a v e instruction from the T r u e One. Since the beginning, w h e n I
31
c r e a t e d y o u , y o u r L o r d h a s magnified a n d strengthened y o u a b o v e
all. Y o u were cast into m e while y e t a child, a n d the T r u e One a b a t e d
me, so t h a t y o u were lifted out of m e . "
I t w a s as though Moses w a s s a y i n g to it, " B y the will of the m i g h t y
T r u e One w h o w a s revealed there, be the same again. If there w a s one
m a r v e l once manifested in y o u on m y account, v e r i l y through m e
(many) marvels will y e t be done in y o u . If y o u bore m e w h e n I w a s a
child, verily y o u shall bear me w h e n all the h o l y m y r i a d s a c c o m p a n y
3 2
me. If E g y p t w a s dried u p w h e n I w a s cast into y o u , so y o u will be
dried u p w h e n I pass through y o u . If E g y p t w a s a t peace through
33
astrologers, then it will be in a state of w a r through righteous men.
If Pharaoh rejoiced a t the w o r d s of liars, then he will perish a t the
words of truthful men.
2 8
Presumably the Egyptian sorcerers already ref. to, but in view of Marqah's consist
ency of vocabulary it may be that another tradition is involved, that the astrologers
made predictions about the condition of the sea, stating that at the time of the exodus
2 9 3 0
it would be unfavourable to the Israelites. I.e. •'bos for 'Von. Cf. Mark iv. 39.
3 1 3 2 A 3 8 A
Presumably in the sense that the water saved Moses for life. So . So ;
or 'diviners'.
54 Book I I Moses the S a v i o u r of Israel II- §5
§ 6. V I C T O R Y O F M O S E S I N T H E S E A
Moses entered, the glory before him magnifying his passing through
the R e d - S e a . See the difference between t w o w h o entered:—
Moses entered and P h a r a o h entered.
Moses entered, the D i v i n e One magnifying him.
P h a r a o h entered, the D i v i n e One destroying him.
Moses entered, the glory gladdening his heart.
3 8 3 9 A 4 0 a
1. Aph. as Jew. Targ. Or 'humble' ( Ui^s). For •otbjt ( J u a l ^JJt),
4 1 A 4 2 4 3 A
which emptied me). So . Lit. 'new things'. So : nm^'sx = event, hap
pening.
56 Book I I Moses the S a v i o u r of Israel n. §§.6 l7
§.7 § 7. T H E S O N G OF MOSES
4 6 4 6
A t the beginning of the S o n g ( E x . x v . ) is T H E N , for T I T was
m a d e an extensive garden. T h e T r u e One c o m m a n d e d it and A b r a h a m
m a d e i t — A n d the Lord God planted (Gen. ii. 8 ) , the T r u e One spoke;
And Abraham planted a tamarisk tree" (Gen. x x i . 3 3 ) , the T r u e One
wrote.
T h e n Moses b e g a n a n d said in the sea; h e composed his S o n g a
garden of praises. H e said T H E N t o rear a fine garden w i t h living
trees, a n d also w h e n h e began t o proclaim the w o r d T H E N Creation
w a s renewed a t t h a t . T H E N included Creation a n d S a b b a t h , S a b b a t h
being a n excellent pillar, all of it good, for G o d established it on the
foundation of C r e a t i o n ; t h u s Moses b e g a n w i t h m i g h t y proclamation.
T H E N is the Beginning, the opening—wholly excellent! S a b b a t h is
a c i t y — w h o l l y blessed! B e g i n n i n g is a n origin, w h o l l y spiritual! S a b
48
b a t h is a place, w h o l l y s a c r e d !
H e r e the knowledge of Moses w a s revealed to the world and it pro
v i d e d knowledge for the living a n d the dead. H e then said S A N G
4 9
( Y A S l R ) — a momentous, unalterable w o r d . T h e s e are eminent words,
like shining light. T H E N S A N G ( ' A Z Y A S l R ) he began it a n d pro
claimed it. ' A Z , w h o s e inner meaning is of significance, is a foundation
t h a t cannot b e destroyed.
B e g i n n i n g w a s created a n d S a b b a t h brought into being. T h e cove
n a n t w i t h A b r a h a m w a s manifested in the n u m b e r Z A I N ( = 7 ) .
4 4 4 5
TP, as often in Sam. Aram., used emphatically in the copula. (noo) SDO =
4 6
x6xe; it is remarkable that it is the Aram, form that is used for the bibl. n». So
4 7 A
Petermann spells, Brevis Linguae Samaritanae, 1873, p. 1. Or 'grove' ( 'garden'—as
4 8
often for this passage). The Sam. translators from the 14th cent, did not un
derstand this obscure passage, and the Arabic versions are muddled and confused.
4 8
V. n. 67 of text.
I I . §. 7 T h e S o n g of Moses 57
See the w o r l d Y A § I R w i t h w h i c h t h e great p r o p h e t Moses b e g a n .
6 0
H e m a d e it a shield in t h e face of all s h a m e , five hundred a n d t e n
comprising three sections—the y e a r s of the sojourning of t h e ancestors,
the y e a r s of s l a v e r y for their children, the y e a r s of the prophethood b y
w h i c h Moses reached this high status. A n d also \ A Z — t h e g r e a t prophet
Moses S A N G , a n d all t h e Israelites w i t h h i m .
T h e r e is a problem i n v o l v e d here, a b o u t w h i c h w e a s k the E l d e r s of
the people w h o w e r e g a t h e r e d together t o receive k n o w l e d g e of t h e
wonders w h i c h G o d did in E g y p t through Moses H i s s e r v a n t . T h e s e
were prior to the w o n d e r s done in the R e d S e a in E g y p t in t h e presence
of Israel. W h y should t h e w o n d e r s done in t h e R e d S e a precede t h e
5 1
wonders done in E g y p t in this S o n g ?
5 2
And Israel saw the Egyptians dead upon the seashore ( E x . x i v . 3 0 b )
53
before The great work which the Lord did against the Egyptians
(Ex. xiv. 3 1 a ; Targ.)?
T h e explanation of this problem is t h a t t h e y d i d not continue to b e
lieve in G o d a n d in H i s s e r v a n t Moses. W h e n t h e y s a w t h e wonderful
deeds done b y the L o r d in the sea, a n d the death of all the E g y p t i a n s ,
t h e y believed in the L o r d a n d in Moses H i s s e r v a n t . A f t e r t h e d e a t h of
the E g y p t i a n s through w r a t h a n d anger, H e lifted t h e m u p onto t h e
surface of the sea. T h e w o n d e r is t h a t H e m a d e their faces u p t u r n e d ,
t h a t Israel m i g h t see them. A f t e r t h e y h a d seen t h e m , t h e y s a n k d o w n
a n d t h e y s a w them no more.
T H E A R R A N G E M E N T OF T H E SONG OF MOSES
Then Moses and the people of Israel sang this song to the Lord (Ex.
x v . 1 ) . E a c h of them remembered the w o r d Y A S l R out of all the w o r d s
of the praise, because it comprised all t h e w o r d s of the praises—an
e x t r e m e l y fine arrangement w a s the arrangement b y Moses a n d t h e
Israelites in this S o n g b y the sea!
Moses w a s standing b y t h e sea, his face turned t o w a r d s M o u n t
Gerizim, Bethel. A l l the E l d e r s of Israel w e r e standing b e h i n d h i m ,
a n d behind the E l d e r s w e r e all the Israelites. T h e prophet Moses s a n g
the S o n g in sections. W h e n he finished each section, he w o u l d fall silent
a n d all the E l d e r s would respond w i t h the verse I will sing to the Lord,
5i
for He has triumphed gloriously: the horse and his rider He has thrown
6 5
into the sea (verse i ) . T h e n all Israel w o u l d s a y (The Lord is) my
strength and my song, and He has become my salvation (verse 2) u p t o
The Lord is a man of war; the Lord is his name (verse 3 ) .
8 0
The numerical value of In D. I marg. the fi. j+e. v JUt-l J-S -)i ^JAJ\ SJS-J fa
A» J^-j)l . . ^ (now 430) r\« _ &* J (i.e. total215) gbu .y** J-S ^ U > _ H • yyf>. J J
r v
6 1
Ex. xii. 40 is then quoted for the figure 430. (total 510 now). I.e. why E x . xv.
5 2 6 8 6 4 A
1-7 before 8-10. As S.P., but last word in Aram. Lit. 'from'.
6 6
cf. R.S.V. n. As S.P. with var. tvibx for n s s and Aram, na'a for D'3.
58 Book I I Moses the S a v i o u r of Israel I I . §§.7.8
§ 8. T H E D O W N F A L L O F P H A R A O H & H I S A R M Y
N M I •A-'-IJ
8 0
V. n. 149, Book I (trans.); so the sequel, implying the making of oblations by Pharaoh,
8 1 8 2
and not as A.V., R.S.V. etc. V. n. 60. R.S.V. *.. drew near . . *. <ai*: cf.
6 4 A
Syr. JLv**j. «» So the Sam. interpretation of E x . xiv. 20, not as R.S.V. 'victory'.
6 5 8 8
Clearly a proverb. For np's (j*2-l). According to this reckoning, the slaying
8 7
of the firstborn does not count with the plagues; v. n. 89, Book I (trans.). 'Our
Lord' here used for the first time in this way, suggestive of Christian influence.
6 8
1. "n»n« with L.
60 Book I I Moses the S a v i o u r of Israel II. §.8
69
T h o s e w h o f l e d to the T r u e One escaped; the remaining forces of
P h a r a o h w e r e s a y i n g , " N o w w e k n o w t h a t our destruction h a s d r a w n
near. I t w a s not because of us t h a t it happened to us as it did through
Israel, w h i l e w e w e r e in E g y p t , so t h a t w e pursued after them. W h a t
is t h i s w e hope for ? I t is hurtful to u s ! N o w , w h a t e v e r w e do w e see
t h e m (the captains) standing speaking w i t h P h a r a o h , ' W h e r e is the
skill y o u h a d a t t h e beginning ? Y o u h a v e seen t h e w a t e r of the sea
c h a n g e d from a f a v o u r a b l e state t o this u n f a v o u r a b l e one.' A n d n o w
speech increases more t h a n all t h a t took place before (when the c a m
p a i g n w a s being planned). If w e h a d been delivered a t the beginning,
in a n y case w e w o u l d perish in the e n d . "
I t seemed a s though the T r u e One said to t h e m , " R e s t r a i n yourselves
from such t a l k . I w i l l deal w i t h y o u ! "
70
P h a r a o h ' s a n s w e r t o t h e m w a s , " B a a l - Z e p h o n s e e s u s a n d w h a t is
to h a p p e n t o us. H e will not y i e l d to H i m a n d he will not let us d o w n . "
I t w a s a though the T r u e One said t o him, " Y o u r bold attitude will
bring y o u misfortune. I t will become y o u r destruction. S e e w h a t the
great P o w e r f u l One w i l l d o ! "
7 4 7 5
For npm, root 'press, make urgent'. Cf. msma of the glory of God (Jew.
7 6 7 7
nrao). Lit. 'dust', fig. as in Marqah's Hymn IV of the Defter. V. n. 153, Book
7 8 A
I (trans.). So JZ\^i.
62 Book I I Moses t h e S a v i o u r of Israel II. §.8
8 0 A 8 1 A
So . So . ipDT as Syr. and cf. basic idea behind Rabb. Heb. and Jew.
8 2 8 8 8 4
Targ. root. Or 'taskmasters'. For rrop. Or 'bides, covers up'.
6 4
Book I I Moses the S a v i o u r of Israel II. §.8
8 5 8 6
For nmnt. Common attribute of Moses (the Spokesman of God, the Proclaimer,
8 7
etc.). There is no Sam. notion of a kingdom of God, despite such allusions.
8 8 A 8 9 A 9 0 A 9 1
Or as 'appointed'. ijt. 1. Hoph'al as VIII root j^. The ref. is
9 2
to the death under the sea and the plagues on the land. Usually naans = 'rest',
but here as Bibl. Heb. nnoi.
II. §.8 T h e D o w n f a l l of Pharaoh's A r m y 65
A d a m w a s raised welcomed h i m truly. L i k e good m e n t h e y were
brought u p w i t h favour.
93
T H E T E N T H , the destruction of the E g y p t i a n s w h e n t h e y e n t e r e d
94
into the h o l o c a u s t w h e n morning came, a t the decree of the T r u e
One—the returning of the w a t e r to its former state b y the m i g h t of the
Powerful One w h o controlled it. T h e y were all going through j u d g e
ment, punished b y the L o r d of power.
A d a m arose in the world, speaking to m a g n i f y t h a n k s g i v i n g a t
morning time. S o the E g y p t i a n s in the morning were perishing a n d the
whole world w a s in terror a t t h a t event. T h u s H e said in H i s holy
Scripture, "And the sea returned to its deep state at the turn of the
9h
morning" ( E x . x i v . 2j).
Observe the inner meaning of this statement a n d praise H i m w h o
made it w i t h sincerity of heart. H e said concerning the sea t h a t H e
brought it b a c k to its deep state w i t h great might, t h a t H e m i g h t
teach all generations t h a t it is not in man's p o w e r to pass through the
96
sea. If it were, the sea w o u l d not h a v e such great d e p t h .
There w a s no sign of w h a t w a s to happen, b u t the w a t e r w h i c h w a s
in it closed over them w i t h m i g h t y power. T h e w a t e r s w e r e like moun
tains, so much did t h e y hem them in, showing t h a t there w a s great
depth. T h e m i g h t y W i s e One h a s said t h a t it is not in man's p o w e r to
comprehend it.
Pharaoh a n d his people were perishing in the sea in great a n d ex
ceedingly m i g h t y recompense, a n d the wonders t h a t w e r e seen a t t h a t
time were crowned b y the m a j e s t y of H i m w h o w r o u g h t t h e m — S I X
97
in the s e a a n d F O U R on four separate occasions took place.
T H E S I X t h a t took place in the sea—contemplate them a n d g i v e
praise to the Powerful One w h o does wonders.
The first, the w a v e s of the sea were turned from beneath u p w a r d s b y
H i s abundant power.
98
The second, the dividing of the w a t e r s into t w o h e a p s to m a k e a p a t h
w a y for that crossing. T h u s H e said, "And the Lord drove the sea back
9 9
by an east wind" ( E x . x i v . 2 1 ) .
The third: high walls on the right a n d on the left preserved them. T h u s
H e said, " The waters being a wall to them on their right hand and on their
left" ( E x . x i v . 2 2 ) .
The fourth t h a t w a s done b y the great might of G o d w a s the turning of
the w a t e r from below u p w a r d s , as H e said, "At the blast of thy nostrils
1 0 0
the waters piled up" ( E x . x v . 8 ) .
9 3 9 4 A 9 5
For jirwaa. = Syr. ( o^j). Not all of this seems to be exact
9 6
quotation from a Targ. Marqah has introduced the ref. to the depth of the sea. For
9 7 9 8 A
pins (q. 1.), et seq. So D. 3, L . 1, and so below. Cf. Bibl. Heb. root I X K .
9 9 1 0 0
'sides'. So S.P. with var. -pVH. SoS.P. with var. -JDK.
66 Book I I Moses the S a v i o u r of Israel n. §§.8,9
§.9 § 9. A S O N G O F M O S E S
This is my God ( E x . x v . 2) w h o nurtured m e in the loins of A m r a m .
This is my God w h o formed m e in the w o m b of J o c h e b e d , daughter
of L e v i .
This is my God w h o preserved m e in the a r k in E g y p t ' s Nile.
1 0 2
This is my God w h o g a v e prophetic p o w e r to Miriam, in con
nection w i t h w h a t w o u l d h a p p e n to me.
1 0 3
This is my God w h o prevented m e from sucking impure milk.
This is my God w h o g a v e m e pure milk, not t h a t of a stranger,
to suck.
This is my God w h o led m e to edge of the desert, to the Mount of
God.
1 0 1 1 0 2 1 0 3
As S.P. with var. 1 H S p. So in C. p. 35 (V). 1. n s v .
I I . f.9 A song of Moses 67
1 0 5 A 1 0 8
104 A a i s o obscure. So ; lit. 'expectation'. Ref. Gen. xv. 5. For nri'K.
68 Book I I Moses the S a v i o u r of Israel II. §.9
W 7
him. D i v i n i t y willed deliverance w i t h wonders, a n d prophethood
w a s established t o elevate his status. D i v i n i t y w a s glorified and
prophethood magnified.
Israel w e r e exalted through w h a t Moses h e a r d from H i m , "I ap
peared to Abraham" ( E x . v i . 3 ) , w i t h m i g h t y deliverance, a n d I m a d e
k n o w n t o Moses in a decree, a n d in a l a w . T o A b r a h a m , And routed
them, and pursued them (Gen. x i v . 1 5 ) — t h i s is the deliverance! T o
Moses, Strike the dust of the earth ( E x . viii. 1 6 ; T a r g . ) exceedingly h a r d
on all! T h i s is manifest t r u t h from w h i c h nothing is kept back. W o e
t o the sinner w h o stands before H i m , a n d w o e to y o u , P h a r a o h , for
thinking t h a t y o u w o u l d become stronger through sinning a n d be
filled w i t h k i n g l y status. W o e to the E g y p t i a n s for w h a t t h e y did!
T h e y expected t h a t through their sinning their kingdom w o u l d be
prolonged.
The Lord is a man of war! ( E x . x v . 3 ) .
E X E G E S I S OF T H E SONG OF MOSES
G o d w a g e d f o r t y w a r s , t w e n t y in E g y p t a n d t w e n t y in the sea. I n
1 0 8
the great S o n g H e said, "Is not he your father, who created you?"
(Deut. x x x i i . 6 ) — t h r o u g h wonders w h i c h H e manifested for y o u r sake!
T h e great prophet Moses included t h e m in the section For ask now
(Deut. i v . 3 2 ) in seven words. I t is in the trials, for G o d tried H i s
enemies, not to do t h e m good in the end, as H e did H i s beloved (cf.
1 0 9
D e u t . viii. 1 6 ) .
By signs (Deut. iv. 3 4 , et seq.), for manifold wonders a n d glorious acts
w e r e c o m b i n e d — t h e doing of a c r e a t i v e L o r d .
By wonders, for t h e sorcerers b e c a m e w e a r y from doing the like of
t h e m , because t h e y w e r e the doings of a great a n d awesome G o d .
And by war, for G o d fought w i t h them, until H e delivered the children
of the R i g h t e o u s .
By a mighty hand, for m a n y persons died in the wondrous act a n d it
b e c a m e more a n d more severe.
And an outstretched arm: distinction w a s m a d e b y H i s right h a n d be
tween e v e r y fruitful root a n d poisonous w o r m w o o d (cf. Deut. x x i x . 1 8 ) .
110
And by great terrors, containing e v e r y t h i n g marvellous to the sight
of the e y e , not to t h e hearing of the ear.
E x a l t e d is the prophet w h o manifested great wonders, never before
wrought in all the earth or in any nation ( E x . x x x i v . 1 0 ) .
1 0 7 1 1 0 8
np>V?, for npis ?. I.e. Deut. xxxii, usually so called as distinct from Ex. xv.
1 0 9
The section immediately following is based on Deut. iv. 34, and is in Heb. mixed
1 1 0
with Aram. So R.S.V. The Sam. interpretation is based on the root meaning
(things seen, manifestations).
II, §.9 A song of Moses 69
1 2 3
upbraided them for their evil. This idiom may be translated lit. 'each of them
1 2 1
greater than the other'. Cf. Mark xiii. 26-7 (Matt. xxiv. 31) where instead of the
1 2 8 A
dead we have 'the elect'. But 'the righteous ones'.
II. §9 A song of Moses 7i
W e observe h o w the great prophet Moses spoke concerning the in
1
habitants of Palestine, as H e said in H i s h o l y S c r i p t u r e : Pangs ™ have
seized on the inhabitants of Philistia ( E x . x v . 1 4 ; T a r g . ) . B y this great
prophecy H e revealed the deliverance of I s a a c a n d the efficacy of H i s
127
promise. H e w a s delivered w i t h p a n g s from the g a r d e n a n d w a s
given the land of Palestine, as H e said, "Sojourn in this land, and I will
be with you, and will bless you; for to you and to your descendants I will
give all these lands" (Gen. x x v i . 3 ; T a r g . ) . T h e great prophet Moses re
128
calls here the c o v e n a n t w i t h I s a a c his forefather a n d teaches t h a t
pangs w o u l d strike all the inhabitants of Palestine.
H o w great is y o u r m a j e s t y , O Israel, for m i g h t y wonders w e r e done
for y o u r sake. E x a l t e d is the great prophet Moses w h o m his L o r d
taught w h a t he w o u l d be glorified w i t h , a n d he glorified all the gener
ations of the world, those near to G o d as Moses w a s near, those obe
dient to G o d as Moses w a s , or w h o stood w h e r e Moses stood, or s a w
w h a t Moses s a w , or believed w h a t he believed, or sought a n d attained,
or said and did for H i m w h a t H e willed, or w e r e crowned w i t h k n o w
1 2 9
ledge like Moses, or whose f a c e w a s covered w i t h light (like Moses').
H e w a s m a d e a storehouse of wonders a n d his tongue flowed w i t h
blessings. H i s L o r d did for him w h a t H e h a s not done for a n y other
130
person. Mysteries w e r e u n r a v e l l e d for h i m into revelations; the cre
ations exulted a t him. T h e heavens rejoiced a t h i m ; the earth listened
to his words (Deut. x x x i i . 1 ) . T h e m i n d hearkened to his speech. H e
sustains the living a n d magnifies the dead. W h e r e is there anyone like
Moses, and w h o c a n compare w i t h Moses the prophet, the like of w h o m
h a s not arisen a n d never will arise ?
131
Now are the chiefs of Edom dismayed ( E x . x v . 1 5 ; T a r g . ) . Connected
1 3 2
w i t h this in a similar w a y is the overcoming of the E d o m i t e s and
1 3 3
likewise the Moabites, the former in d i s m a y , the latter in trembling
134
a t the r e p o r t of these wonders. T h u s G o d said, "Now are the chiefs
of Edom dismayed" (ibid.), for the E d o m i t e s h a d expected t h a t their
1 3 5
kingdom would endure. W h e n Israel w e n t forth, t h e y k n e w t h a t t h e i r
kingdom would suffer change.
J a c o b w e n t to E s a u w i t h m u c h goodwill, a n d E s a u also w e n t forth
136
to meet him. T h e y e m b r a c e d each other a n d their e n m i t y w a s re
m o v e d a n d w a s thereafter changed into love.
W h e n the E d o m i t e s heard that, hostility returned as it h a d been a t
the beginning, and indeed it became twofold—recollection of w h a t h a d
happened in the past and the bringing about of w h a t w a s to come, for
t h e y could read the records of the ancestors w h i c h t h e y possessed. S o
1 2 6
For V'n, et seq. 1 2 7 A
So . So J^c.
1 2 8 A 1 2 9
So and usually for na^x. A
1 3 0 1 3 1 1 3 2 A
Lit. 'expanded'. But imbm = I^LAJJI, et scq., 'were astonished'. |»j Jl! J
1 3 4 A 1 3 5
133 A again root ,jijtj. tin interpreted by as from root t u . The Edomites'.
1 3 8
= Targ. Onk. Pa.
72 Book I I Moses the S a v i o u r of Israel II. §-9
137
also t h e y were in the possession of I s r a e l . W h e n Moses recounted the
records of the ancestors before the children w h o succeeded them, t h e y
believed in the T r u e One a n d k n e w t h a t the apostleship of Moses w a s
true. W h e n the E d o m i t e s heard t h a t , t h e y were d i s m a y e d and became
hostile, k n o w i n g t h a t t h e y w o u l d be destroyed b y Israel and would
h a v e to face them in severe distress. Hence Moses mentioned here the
chiefs, as the T r u e One directed h i m in this prophecy w h e n H e said,
1 3 8
"These are the kings (Gen. x x x v i . 3 1 ; T a r g . ) . Moses said these words
a n d then m a d e reply a t the c o m m a n d of the T r u e One, "Blessed are
y o u if y o u k n o w t h a t y o u are the writer of their records and under
stand the secret w h i c h is hidden w i t h me. Y o u will be magnified
thereby a m o n g all c r e a t u r e s . "
Praised be the K i n g , eternal in H i s essence, w h o sustains all H i s
beloved a n d a t all times is w a t c h f u l over them.
I t behoves us ever to b o w d o w n before H i m to the ground, with
heart full of faith, a n d honour the m e m o r y of a faithful prophet w h o
has p o w e r o v e r all creatures, and to see h o w he attained prophethood.
W i t h p r o p h e c y he spoke in the h e a r t of the sea, a n d the T r u e One
139
attested h i m ; the world magnified him for w h a t he said w h e n he
loosed terror a m o n g the Moabites; so the T r u e One said, "the leaders
of Moab, trembling seizes them" ( E x . x v . 1 5 ; T a r g . ) .
W h e r e did Moses get this k n o w l e d g e ? If it h a d not been for his
prophethood he could not h a v e said it then. T h u s the T r u e One re
corded w h a t B a l a a m said about Israel, It shall crush the corners of Moab
1 4 0
(Num. x x i v . 1 7 ; T a r g . ) . L i k e w i s e the great prophet Moses (said),
"Woe to you, 0 Moab" ( N u m . x x i . 2 9 ; T a r g . ) . T h e r e w a s knowledge of
the destruction underlying his s a y i n g You are undone, 0 people (ibid.)
like y e s t e r d a y ' s y e s t e r d a y are t h e y ! Moses' s a y i n g Woe to you repre
sents here complete destruction.
T h e y were in terror w h e n t h e y heard t h a t the sea w a s the exe
cutioner of the E g y p t i a n s a n d t h a t P h a r a o h ' s kingdom h a d been sub
dued b y its fury, through good men pledged to its power. O world, take
hold of w h a t has been done in y o u a n d w h a t also is going to come in
the second generation. T h e third generation is the generation of the
141
repentant, in w h o m will b e found no b l e m i s h and no apostasy. W o e
to the generation w h i c h is to c o m e ! I t will b e all m i g h t y judgements
a n d punishments. I t is fitting t h a t w e should not meet this generation,
nor see w h a t will happen to it. B u t w h y should this be so with respect
t o us seeing t h a t w e too are guilty, h a v i n g rejected the knowledge t h a t
magnifies life ? If w e (on the other hand) m a k e haste a n d seek the T r u e
1 8 7
An interesting insight into the common ancestry of the Hebrews who left Egypt
1 8 8 1 3 8
and the Edomites. I.e. the beginning of the chronicle of the Edomites. Reading
A 1 1 0
with as -jnoa. If 1S7DB is correct, render 'aided'. R.S.V. 'forehead of Moab'.
1 4 1 A
So . Jew. Targ. mans = 'confusion'.
I I . §§-9,io T h e H o l y Mountain of G o d 73
The light is from the fire, for fire is the origin b y w h i c h everything is
controlled a n d m a d e to exist.
The two tablets are from the D i v i n e One. H e produced them b y H i s
p o w e r from the will of H i s mind.
The Sabbath is the most special a m o n g all d a y s , for H e set it a p a r t b y
itself.
Adam is the most special of all creatures, for from him prophets and
1 4 8
righteous m e n arise in the w o r l d .
Mount Gerizim is especially holy. G o d m a d e it the dwelling place of
H i s glory.
Moses is a special one w h o magnifies e v e r y special thing.
Israel is special a m o n g all peoples. G o d chose them a n d made them
select.
T h u s G o d w r o t e in H i s Scripture concerning E n o c h , Enoch walked
with God (Gen. v . 2 2 ) — h e k n e w the place of the T r u e One a n d hastened
to it, j u s t as A b r a h a m did a t the time w h e n he w a s called. G o d said to
A b r a h a m , "To the land which I shall show you (Gen. xii. 1 ; T a r g . ) .
W h a t w a s it H e showed h i m if not the G o o d l y Mount ? H e spoke to
h i m a g a i n a t the time of his trial, w h e n H e demanded I s a a c a n d re
1 9
v e a l e d H i s holiness; H e said, "To the land of Moriah" * (Gen.xxii. 2 ;
T a r g . ) , good a n d blessed. A b r a h a m k n e w it a n d hastened to it with
160
knowledge.
H e a r n o w a question in connection w i t h w h a t w a s said to A b r a h a m
here. W h a t is the meaning of the T r u e One's s a y i n g to him w h e n H e
requested I s a a c , "Offer him (there) as a burnt offering upon one of the
mountains which I shall tell you"? (Gen. x x i i . 2 ; T a r g . ) . H e t a u g h t it
a t the beginning of the speech. R e t u r n y o u r m i n d to the question and
listen now.
T h e answer does not require a n y second source of knowledge. W h e n
he c a m e , supported in righteousness a n d truth, he sought the place
G o d h a d chosen. W h e n he s a w it a t a distance, he turned t o w a r d s it
a n d p r a y e d . W h e n he h a d finished p r a y i n g , he raised his eyes. H e only
raised his eyes to worship—for it w a s the morning hour w h e n he would
s t a n d a n d p r a y . A n d where w a s the direction of his p r a y e r unless to
1 5 1
w a r d s M o u n t Gerizim ? W h e n he worshipped sincerely, he perceived
b y his intelligence t h a t y o u do not s a y concerning of which I shall tell
you (Gen. x x i i . 2 ; T a r g . ) t h a t it refers to w h a t is to come, b u t to w h a t
h a s been, for the w o r d 'which' ( \ A § E R ) m a k e s this clear and explains
the matter.
1 4 8
Through the 'pure chain' by which is transmitted the pure light from Adam.
1 4 9
rrma, apparently rendering n'lio, hence in the Sam. interpretation Moriah was
the land of (God's) revelation; but the Sam. Targ. version quoted by Kittel gives
Hirm (appearance, vision). For the Sam. interpretation cf. Symmachus, Vulgate &
1 6 0 A 1 6 1
Pseudo-Jonathan. 'experience'. I.e. a Qibla.
I I . §.io T h e H o l y M o u n t a i n of G o d 75
Behold, I shall set out for y o u certain evidence t h a t the w o r d
l
A § E R has been expressed t h a t y o u m a y k n o w of w h a t h a s past. W h e n
G o d proclaimed the T e n W o r d s ( E x . x x ) , d i d H e not s a y there ' A S E R
H O T S E T I K A (verse 2) ? If it referred to w h a t is t o come, Israel w o u l d
not h a v e gone forth from E g y p t a n d w o u l d not h a v e stopped to hear
this.
I t is good t h a t y o u should realize t h a t A d a m prostrated in its di
rection; t h a t E n o s h proclaimed in the n a m e of the L o r d on i t ; a n d
E n o c h k n e w it a n d hastened t o w a r d s it. N o a h built an a l t a r in front
of it a n d stood a t it a n d praised the L o r d of the world. T h u s it is said
concerning him, just as w i t h A b r a h a m , "Then Noah built an altar"
(Gen. viii. 2 0 ) : "And Abraham built an altar there" (Gen. x x i i . 9), e x
a c t l y as N o a h did. T h u s A b r a h a m t r u l y ascribed greatness to our G o d ,
w h o implanted secrets in the hearts of good men, t h a t H e m i g h t illu
mine them a n d t h a t t h e y in turn m i g h t reveal them, for the hearts of
good men are bound u p w i t h their L o r d , a n d righteousness sustains
them and truth makes t h e m a b u n d a n t in goodness.
I s a a c s a w it, J a c o b k n e w it, J o s e p h possessed it. I n great perfection
it w a s inherited, from fathers to their sons. H a p p y t h e y w h o possess it
162
a n d t h e y w h o inherit i t ! T h e r e w a s no deviating a n d i n s o l e n t son
among them, b u t t h e y w e r e all good from beginning to end.
1 6 3
That was a time w h o l l y of blessing, the time w h e n the great
prophet Moses w a s seen on the Mount. L e t us m a g n i f y our time b y
praising our L o r d a n d not ceasing t o do so lest w e b e brought to an
1 5 4
end. L e t us m a k e H i m a shield in the face of all impure men, per
1 5 5
chance w e m a y dwell in H i s f a v o u r , a n d b e supported b y belief in
the L o r d and in Moses H i s servant, for if it h a d not been for the great
prophet Moses the l a w w o u l d not h a v e been revealed a n d no c o m
m a n d m e n t would h a v e come down. L e t us m a g n i f y our L o r d a n d b e
lieve in H i m and testify a n d s a y , " T h e r e is only one G o d . "
I t is a special thing t h a t w e receive blessings from our L o r d , w h o
is merciful and pitiful, doing good to those w h o love H i m . L e t us con
sider Moses, the M a n of G o d , in the sea as he speaks w i t h m i g h t y
p r o p h e c y — " O n thy own mountain" ( E x . x v . 1 7 ) . W h a t is H i s o w n ?
Israel is H i s own, as H e said, "His allotted heritage Israel" (Deut.
166
xxxii. 9). The place for thy abode ( E x . x v . 1 7 ) contains t w o p a r t s ;
first the holy place (cf. verse 1 3 ) , second The angels of God d i d not cease
ascending and descending on it (Gen. x x v i i i . 1 2 ) . W h e n c e is the House
of G o d and the dwelling place for H i s glory ? T h e r e is no Presence a n y
where else! A s H e said, "But you shall seek . . . his habitation" (Deut.
1 5 2 A
The proper orthography 'TSB (root ns) occurs in Book IV; so interprets.
1 5 3 1 6 4 1 5 5 A
Lit. 'world', et seq. Or 'before we die'. 'in tranquillity', which is the
1 5 3
central idea contained in the notion of the return of the divine Favour. ^Knur
add. in S.P. and L X X .
7 6 Book I I Moses the S a v i o u r of Israel II. §.io
167
xii. 5 ) . T h e r e is to be no sacrificing except before it, no offering except
on it, no oblation except there, no freewill offering, tithe, firstfruit,
deliverance or blessing received a p a r t from it ever, for it is the place of
the T r u e One's Presence a n d the dwelling place for His great glory.
W o e to those w h o disobey the T r u e One through lying, w h o h a v e
chosen for themselves a place of worship other than it! S a y to them,
" W h a t is this w i c k e d apostasy, in t h a t y o u h a v e s t r a y e d to where A b e l
offered his offering, a n d not to the place where the divine Presence is ?
If y o u s a y , ' W h o appointed it as a place ?' and if y o u s a y , ' W h o built
it ?', woe to the m i n d t h a t h a s turned a w a y from the T r u e One and
l f i 8
manifested provocation w i t h all its m i g h t !
O chosen out of all peoples, hold fast to the T r u e One! T u r n not
a w a y from H i m , nor leave H i m ! T h a t w o u l d be unfitting. I t is good
for us to w a l k in obedience to G o d a n d to give serious thought to the
s a y i n g of the great prophet Moses, 0 Lord, which thy hands have estab
1 6 9
lished ( E x . x v . 1 7 ) , in the holy place—as H e said, "And I will dwell
among the people of Israel" ( E x . x x i x . 45). T h e r e H e dwells and His
work is done.
H e also repeated the s a y i n g of the great prophet Moses, "And let them
160
make me a sanctuary, that I may dwell in your midst" ( E x . x x v . 8 ;
T a r g . ) . W h a t is the point of a s a n c t u a r y w i t h o u t an offering? W h a t is
1 6 1
the point of an offering w i t h o u t obedience ? T h u s the great prophet
159
Moses said, "0 Lord, which thy hands have established"—a great
162
p r o p h e c y since H e did not establish it until a f t e r the destruction!
L e t us m a g n i f y our L o r d a t all times a n d praise H i m ever, and extol
H i m in e v e r y w a y , a n d believe in Moses the prophet w h o brought life to
us a n d w a r n e d us of death, a n d t a u g h t us t h a t w h i c h brings good things.
The Lord will reign for ever and ever ( E x . x v . 1 8 , et seq.)—an en
during kingdom w h i c h shall never be changed.
The Lord will reign for ever and ever; w o e to anyone w h o is a n
e n e m y to H i m !
The Lord will reign for ever and ever; blessed are those w h o believe
in H i m .
The Lord will reign for ever and ever; blessed is he w h o d r a w s near
to H i m a n d w o e to h i m w h o w i t h d r a w s from H i m .
The Lord will reign for ever and ever. H e conjoins the mention of
the n a m e of the L o r d w i t h t h a t of Mount Gerizim, declaring t h a t
the holiness of the chosen place is enduring, from the d a y G o d
created it even till the D a y of V e n g e a n c e .
It h a s T H I R T E E N N A M E S in the l a w , each declaring its glory!
The first: The Mountain of the East (Gen. x. 3 0 ) , for the G o d of the
157 1 5 8 A
As S.P. with var. UOBV. So ; cf. Gen. Rabba s. 98 for '^n "B in this sense.
159 1 8 0 1 6 1
'hands' as R.S.V. So S.P., L X X . M.T. 'their'. inn normally thus, or
,_ 1 6 2
'a pleasant odour' ( = n )). 1. i n a a .
II. §.IO T h e H o l y Mountain of G o d 77
E a s t h a d chosen it from the d a y s of Creation. I t w a s after this t h a t H e
uncovered the d r y land a n d appointed seven reliable testimonies to it,
w h i c h are revealed in the T e n W o r d s ( E x . x x ) from the mouth of t h e
M i g h t y One through a faithful, righteous prophet.
0 Lord, which thy hands have established.
The Lord will reign for ever and ever.
The second: Bethel (Gen. xii. 8), for G o d m i g h t y a n d a w e s o m e is a
shield a n d helper to those w h o believe in H i m . H e m a d e it a place of
1 6 3
refuge, an escape for all w h o r e t u r n to G o d .
0 Lord, which thy hands have established.
The Lord will reign for ever and ever.
The third: The House of God (Gen. x x v i i i . 1 7 ) , for the h o l y angels d i d
not cease uttering praise to their L o r d , seeking G o d in it.
0 Lord, which thy hands have established.
The Lord will reign for ever and ever.
The fourth: The Gate of Heaven (ibid.), for all w h o t u r n t o w a r d s it,
seeking G o d , will find H i m near. I t is the place of the Nazirites, the
tithes, the oblations, the v o w s , the blessings, the sacrifices, the gifts,
the burnt offerings a n d all the offerings.
0 Lord, which thy hands have established.
The Lord will reign for ever and ever.
1 6 4
The fifth: Its name was Luza at first (Gen. x x v i i i . 1 9 ) — i . e . this n a m e
165
w a s given because of its g l o r y a n d l i g h t — a s J a c o b said, "How awe
some is this place" (Gen. x x v i i i . 1 7 ) .
0 Lord, which thy hands have established.
The Lord will reign for ever and ever.
The sixth: H e m a d e it a sanctuary ( E x . x v . 1 7 ) , like a holy place, a
place for the dwelling of holiness, for a holy congregation to turn to.
H e spoke (the words) Holy to God ( L e v . x x v i i . passim)—Majestic in
holiness ( E x . x v . 1 1 ) . I t is as the holy prophet said, "0 Lord, which
Thou hast made . . . the sanctuary" ( E x . x v . 1 7 ) .
0 Lord, which thy hands have established.
The Lord will reign for ever and ever.
The seventh: Mount Gerizim (cf. D e u t . x i . 2 9 ) , the place of the Blessing,
as H e said, "You shall set the blessing on Mount Gerizim" (ibid.)—"to
186
put his name there" (Deut. xii. 5)—"there I will come to you and bless
1 6 7
you" ( E x . x x . 2 4 ) .
0 Lord, which thy hands have established.
The Lord will reign for ever and ever.
1 6 8
ano rarer than arm. The name Shaheb (for the Taheb) occurs only once in the
1 6 1 1 8 5
Defter. So S.P. nn*? (M.T. nV). This interpretation of the name Luz(a)
1 8 8 1
seems to be based on rfr = an almond tree (Gen. xxx. 37). So S.P. (M.T. mc ?).
1 8 7
So S.P. & L X X . M.T. --atB-nK.
7 8 Book I I Moses the S a v i o u r of Israel II. §§.IO,II
1 , 8 1 8 9
As S.P. (M.T. ms.'3J). This seems to support the interpretation of r w v mn">
1 7 0 1 , 1 A
as 'The Lord will provide'. As S.P. with var. T S ' . So . pmp = Syr.
JLiiSftJO (xdt(uvoi) ?
II. § . I I G o d ' s Dealings w i t h Israel 79
1 7 2
Thus God d i d w i t h the children of H i s servants. H e lifted t h e m
u p on eagles' w i n g s a n d led them through the sea on d r y l a n d a s t h e y
followed H i s glory.
Moses, the son of H i s house, b e magnified, son of A m r a m , the prophet
1 7 3
whom the Lord knew face to face (Deut. x x x i v . i o ) , in things concealed
and revealed, w h o w a s faithful respecting all the signs w h i c h H e c o m
manded—the wonders w h i c h the L o r d sent h i m to do, for H e k n e w h i m
in the l a n d of E g y p t a n d in the sea.
A l l the servants of P h a r a o h H e brought to a n end a n d felled from
a b o v e a n d t h e y perished through ten strokes. T h o s e left in the R e d
S e a and in all his land H e d e s t r o y e d — e v e r y t h i n g in it a n d everyone of
strong h a n d , w i t h manifold wonders w h i c h Moses, the most distin
guished of all men, d i d ; for he includes the n a m e of e v e r y one of
them—all of them great m a r v e l s .
Praise be to the One w h o created t h e m a n d e v e r y great spectacle,
from the d a y Moses b e g a n to perform the signs u p to the splitting of
the R e d S e a and the events t h a t took place therein. Blessed is the d a y
on which Moses prophesied a n d w a s sent to deliver the children of H i s
servants from the p o w e r of the E g y p t i a n s , after t w o hundred a n d s i x t y
y e a r s of sojourning a n d one hundred a n d forty y e a r s of s l a v e r y a n d
wretchedness. Children w e r e increasing; t h e y multiplied during t w o
hundred and ten y e a r s , until t h e y reached a total of six hundred thou
sand from an original s e v e n t y persons.
Commemorate well A b r a h a m , father of a multitude of nations (Gen.
1 7 4
xvii. 5 ) w h o m the L o r d m a d e to k n o w the condition of his children
175
and to see t r i b e s .
T h e righteous one, w h o w a s from I s a a c , H e t a u g h t in the v a l l e y of
1 7 6
the Y a b b o k w h e n he stood w i t h H i s m a n , and he touched the hollow
1 7 7
of his thigh (Gen. x x x i i . 2 5 ) .
1 7 8
T h a t w a s a great s a g a , none like i t ; it is divided into three sections,
the first external, the middle one in the dream state, a n d the third a s
the first.
T h e L o r d m a d e k n o w n to A b r a h a m ten sections in the first—mani
fest like the light of the sun; in the middle state thirteen sections
dealing w i t h the first kingdom of Israel; a n d in the last ten sections
179
expounding the condition of the second k i n g d o m . T h e r e are then
these thirty-three sections in the saga of A b r a h a m , on w h o m be peace.
L e t us break off here and think of G o d , w h o brings about divine
affairs from A d a m , for example w h e n H e said to A b r a h a m concerning
his descendants, "Four hundred years" (Gen. x v . 1 3 ) — t h e first of t h e m
1 7 2 A 1 7 3 1 7 4 1 7 6 A
So . As S.P. with var. insi'. As S.P. with var. D'Tin.
1 7 6 A 1 7 7
'judgements' as if from root DDB. 'the angel'. Part S.P., part Targ.
1 7 8 1 7 8
Lit. 'place', et seq. I.e. the final period of divine Favour, to be initiated by
the Taheb.
8o Book I I Moses the S a v i o u r of I s r a e l II. § § . " , 1 2
1 8 6 A 1 8 7
So . Cf. the New Testament, especially Pauline, emphasis on 'powers', passim.
II. §.12 T h e W o n d e r of Moses 83
The eighth: w i t h his eyes he s a w the angels of h e a v e n in their r a n k s —
as H e said, " H e looks upon the form of the angels" (cf. N u m . xii. 8).
1 8 8
A f t e r t h a t he s a w all the l a n d from the r i v e r P i s h o n a s f a r as t h e
river E u p h r a t e s a n d even t o the farthest sea.
1 8 9
The ninth: his tender y o u t h did not l e a v e h i m , nor d i d a n y accident
1 9 0
befall him, nor were his e y e s d i m m e d ; t h u s he could see the length
of d a y s a n d y e a r s .
The tenth: he w a s buried b y the h a n d of G o d on M o u n t N e b o , a n d no
1 9 1
one will k n o w his burial place till the D a y of V e n g e a n c e . W h o is the
192
prophet to w h o m it w a s said, " G o u p t o the place w h i c h I h a v e set
apart for y o u since the d a y s of Creation" ? T h e r e are four c a v e s p r e
pared from the third d a y , Machpelah for the Righteous, M o u n t Gerizim
for the s a n c t u a r y , Mount H o r for the priesthood, a n d M o u n t N e b o for
the prophethood.
Blessed are y o u , Israel, for the L o r d is y o u r G o d .
Blessed are y o u , Israel, for y o u r fathers are the righteous a n
cestors.
Blessed are y o u , Israel, for Mount Gerizim is y o u r place of worship.
Blessed are y o u , Israel, for Moses the son of A m r a m is y o u r
prophet.
Blessed are y o u , Israel, for the h o l y l a w is y o u r book.
Blessed are y o u , Israel! W h o is like y o u , the delivered people?
T h e L o r d our G o d is one L o r d .
Blessed is H i s h o l y n a m e for e v e r !
T h e r e is only one G o d .
1 8 8
The Nile; so . A 1 8 9
So . misunderstands by uli' (dual root Jf), but cf.
A 1 9 0 A
Form II. The word = n^s (see Bibl. Heb. root) = Syr.. The ref. is to Deut. xxxiv. 7.
1 9 1 1 9 2
Cf. Deut. xxxiv. 6. In the sense 'where is there such a . . ' ?
BOOK in
T H E NEW STATUS OF I S R A E L
In the Great Name of the Lord
A l s o b y M a r q a h . C o m m e n t a r y on And Moses and the
Levitical priests said (Deut. x x v i i . 9)
§ 1. T H E L E V I T I C A L P R E R O G A T I V E S §.1
1 3
Through Kohath (Num. iii. 27). D. VlVaa, L . "?V?J3 (DA I > <u» j ) , but
3 4
I. ^aa. Ref. to Phinehas (Num. xxv. n , 13), grandson of Aaron. I.e. in the
Scripture. The verb ana in Sam. literature often means technically 'write in Scripture'.
88 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel H I . §.]
it alone. H e said in another place, "Not trees for food you may destroy"
(Deut. x x . 2 0 ; T a r g . ) .
I t is our d u t y to be a tree good to behold, crowned w i t h goodly
fruits, a n d to hasten to acquire w i s d o m and fill our souls w i t h w h a t the
T r u e One t a u g h t us. I t does not b e h o v e us to leave ourselves like a
w a s t e land w h i c h h a s nothing in it, or like a tree without fruits, for an
5
end h a s t o b e m a d e of it (cf. ibid.). W e were created rather to acquire
the w i s d o m of our ancestors, as is fitting.
W h e n A a r o n w a s honoured w i t h the priesthood, G o d m a d e mention
a n d revealed to h i m h o w H e w o u l d glorify him. G o d called to Moses
from the midst of the cloud a n d established A a r o n in the priesthood.
H e s a w the likeness of the T a b e r n a c l e a n d G o d c o m m a n d e d him to
m a k e it a n d appointed for A a r o n fifty tasks, forty within it and ten
w i t h o u t ; ten for vestments, ten for works, ten for services, ten for
offerings. Consider each one of t h e m a n d praise the K i n g w h o is eternal
in oneness.
T h e T E N S E R V I C E S — s e e w h a t t h e y are, for t h e y are all performed
in the T a b e r n a c l e — t h e l a v e r in w h i c h one washes before approaching
for holy w o r k ( E x . x x x . 1 7 ) ; the a l t a r for b u r n t offering ( E x . x x x . 1 ) ;
the table ( E x . x x v . 2 3 ) ; the l a m p - s t a n d ( E x . x x v . 3 1 ) ; the golden
a l t a r ( E x . x x x . 1 ) ; the incense for both morning a n d evening ( E x . x x x .
7 - 8 ) ; the fire on the a l t a r burning ( L e v . i. 7 ) ; never quenched; the
sprinkling of the blood ( L e v . i. 5); the incense from within the veil
( L e v . x v i . 1 2 ) ; the blood on a n d before the m e r c y seat ( L e v . x v i . 1 4 ) .
T h e r e are other t a s k s to b e done b y h i m before he m a y approach.
T h e T E N O F F E R I N G S . E v e r y offering is m a d e a t the proper time
m i g h t i l y — t h e first months ( E x . xii. 3 ) ; v o t i v e offering ( L e v . vii. 1 6 ) ;
freewill offering ( L e v . x x i i . 2 1 ) ; perpetual b u r n t offering ( E x . x x i x . 4 2 ) ;
the P a s s o v e r offering ( E x . xii. 1 1 ) ; the firstfruits offering ( E x . x x i i i . 1 6 ) ;
the seventh m o n t h s ( L e v . x x i i i . 2 9 ) ; the fast d a y ( L e v . x x i i i . 2 7 ) ;
t h e pilgrimage of B o o t h s ( L e v . xxiii. 3 4 ) ; the eighth d a y ( L e v . xxiii. 3 6 ) .
Praise be to H i m w h o c o m m a n d e d these!
T h e T E N V E S T M E N T S ( E x . x x v i i i . 4 ) ; the breastplate, the ephod,
t h e robe, the girdle, the t u r b a n ; the coat of checker w o r k ( E x . x x v i i i . 4 ) ,
t h e c a p s ( E x . x x i x . 4 0 ) ; the t w o precious stones ( E x . x x v i i i . 9 ) ; the
h o l y c r o w n ( E x . x x i x . 6 ) ; the t w o other v e s t m e n t s — t h e linen vest
6
ments ( E x . x x x i x . 28) , the finely w o r k e d g a r m e n t s for ministering in.
7
T h e ten sections a p a r t from these there is no need to e x a m i n e .
Observe this glory b y w h i c h A a r o n w a s glorified, w h e n he occupied
t w o statuses, prophethood a n d priesthood. W h e n A a r o n w a s magnified,
h e w a s p a r t n e r to the great prophet Moses time after time. T h e will of
B 8 A
For the general tenor cf. Matt. vii. 1 7 - 1 9 . So . m a x = the linen (white) breeches.
7
I.e. the ones dealing with actual manufacture of equipment.
I I I . H.I.2 T h e S t a t u s of a H o l y People 89
§ 2. T H E S T A T U S O F A H O L Y PEOPLE
1 3 1 4 1 5
For the Levitical priests were present (Deut. xxvii. 9). For rrnnn. Or
'Bethel'.
94 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel H I . §.3
§.3 § 3. T H E S T A T U S O F T H E E L D E R S
Keep His statutes which I command you (Deut. x x v i i . 1 ; T a r g . ) . T h e
great prophet Moses desired to m a k e it a gathering of the congregation
of Israel, because of w h a t G o d h a d t a u g h t h i m about w h a t w o u l d
h a p p e n to them after his death, a n d about the doing of w h a t is evil in
the sight of the L o r d . H e said this to them, speaking of the whole, and
he k n e w t h a t it w a s not going to h a v e a permanent effect except
through the fruitfulness of (the tribe of) J o s e p h , for t h e y w o u l d h a v e
possession of the goodly p l a c e ; t h e y w o u l d come t o it and no others
w o u l d h a v e a n y share in it.
E x a l t e d are J o s e p h a n d all his descendants, for t h e y did not forsake
the t r u t h . W h e n this took place a n d it w a s possessed, Moses commanded
the m a g n i f y i n g of its owner. O n l y J o s e p h kept the w a y of the three
R i g h t e o u s Ones, as often as he passed b y on it, so t h a t he received it
a n d did not go b a c k to w o r d s of evil men. Therefore his father and the
great prophet Moses elevated him for w h a t t h e y k n e w from the R u l e r
of the w o r l d .
B e h o l d h o w the great prophet Moses said w h a t brought magnifica
tion to Israel:
And Moses charged the people the same day (Deut. x x v i i . 1 1 ) , the priests
not being mentioned (this time). H e r e he said something t h a t his L o r d
t a u g h t him. I t is not right for a n y m a n to b e associated w i t h him in
this statement.
And Moses charged the people the same day (ibid. T a r g . ) , speaking of
w h a t w o u l d be manifested then. H e showed them w h a t G o d h a d said,
a n d revealed to t h e m w i t h w h a t t h e y w o u l d be m a d e great. W h e n he
began, he divided the tribes w i t h the great prophetic insight of one for
w h o m it w a s right to reprove, b u t not himself be reproved (Deut.
x x v i i . 1 2 ) . T h u s G o d said to Moses a t the time w h e n H e t a u g h t h i m
w h a t H e t a u g h t J a c o b . H e divided them a n d appointed those for w h o m
there w o u l d b e a t a s k a n d those for w h o m there w o u l d be reproof.
Moses announced to t h e m the crossing of the J o r d a n a n d about w h o
w o u l d receive the Blessing and w h o w o u l d receive the Curse. O people, be
fully a w a k e to w h a t has been done for the tribes, a n d learn perfection.
T h e r e are S I X w h o received the Blessing a n d S I X w h o received
the Curse.
T h o s e w h o w e r e to receive the Blessing on the top of Mount Gerizim
w e r e Simeon, L e v i , J u d a h , Issachar, a n d J o s e p h and B e n j a m i n w h o
w e r e m a d e great w i t h the crown of kingship (Deut. x x v i i . 1 2 ) . T h e six
w h o w e r e to receive the Curse on Mount E b a l w e r e R e u b e n , G a d ,
A s h e r , Z e b u l u n , D a n a n d N a p h t a l i (Deut. x x v i i . 1 3 ) .
A p p l y y o u r minds, y o u w h o hear these words, and g i v e ear to w h a t
is explained n o w before y o u .
i n . §.3 T h e S t a t u s of the E l d e r s 95
T h e s i x w h o m the T r u e One set on M o u n t Gerizim w e r e all good
people, four from L e a h a n d t w o from R a c h e l . T h e r e w e r e no others
with them. H e set t w o from t h e men of prosperity along w i t h t h e sons
16
of the h a n d m a i d e n s . W e m u s t n o w reveal w h y this w a s so.
L e t us turn to A b r a h a m a n d w h a t h e revealed t o us. L e t u s not l e a v e
him. T h e first thing t h a t c a m e t o h i m w a s t h e announcement. H e
17
served a dish before t h e messengers. I s h m a e l could not offer sacrifice
or bear a n y t h i n g of w h a t w a s done t o honour them.
A question n o w arises. L i s t e n t o it in connection w i t h these pre
ceding words. If the fathers were unable t o g o u p t o Mount Gerizim
and receive the Blessing, h o w will their sons come t o Mount Gerizim ?
W i l l t h e y ascend or not ? Y o u h a v e done right, O questioner, in asking
this. T h e great Powerful One desired t o show h o w t h e origins of their
status are four, w h i c h H e established from t h e handmaidens on M o u n t
E b a l b y H i s will. T h e T r u e One purposed t o s h o w Israel t h a t t h e sons
18
of the h a n d m a i d e n s w e r e not like t h e sons of t h e homeborn w o m e n .
S o A b r a h a m decided t h a t a firstborn son should n o t b e (born) of his
19
m a i d s e r v a n t , for he could not (in t h a t case) enter into holiness; until
teaching w a s given t o those w h o pass b y a n d those w h o come, he r e
frained from approaching his servant Ishmael—since A b r a h a m h a d
him b y a maidservant.
See w h a t H e m e a n t t o do w i t h I s a a c . If it h a d not been for w h a t w a s
made k n o w n t o S a r a h (Gen. xviii. 1 0 ) , t h e deed of Cain w o u l d h a v e
been brought about then.
Question. B e prepared t o listen t o it, concerning A s h e r , for he w a s
from a handmaiden a n d his father said something important about
him, w h i c h reveals m u c h prosperity w i t h regard to him, "Asher's food
20
shall be rich" (Gen. x l i x . 2 0 ; T a r g . ) , for he will seek for prosperity a n d
bring it about. H e will not accept the various set-backs he encounters.
Israel (Deut. x x v i i . 1 4 ) — d o not s a y t h a t the w o r d all here includes t h e
whole. H e again separated all a n d Israel. See h o w it is. L e t y o u r m i n d
not turn to anything b u t this. All Israel means Israel and their w o m e n
and children. There is not a m o n g them a n y m i x t u r e (in origin). T h u s
H e said, "When all Israel comes to appear before the Lord your God"
(Deut. x x x i . 1 1 ; T a r g . ) . T h e n H e said again, "Assemble the people"
21
(Deut. x x x i . 1 2 ; T a r g . ) . T h e i r a r r a n g e m e n t w a s according t o a n
22
order—as H e said, "The heads of your tribes."
A n d w h o are their chiefs if not the heads of t h e tribes, y o u r E l d e r s ,
y o u r sages, along w i t h all the men of Israel a n d y o u r children a n d y o u r
1 8
This word (so rmxvrnm later in the same sense) seems to have a background of sun-
1 7 A 1 8 1 9 2 0
worship. So not 'angels'. As nnsVlo, n. 16. Hagar. nntra
2 1 2 2
'greasy, oily'. The order as in Deut. xxix. iofl. If from Deut. v. 23, 1.
A
"En iron or "a? - w i . This would explain the following rnsn; but (as D) 'your
chiefs, then your tribes'.
9 6 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel H I . §.3
§ 4. T H E B L E S S I N G §.4
W h y does he not s t a n d upon Mount Gerizim w i t h those possessed
2 7
of the Blessing, a n d dwell there until w h a t is hidden there be revealed ?
T u r n y o u r mind b a c k to the previous w o r d s a n d realize t h a t the for
eigner cannot ascend Mount Gerizim, for w e see four of w h o m one
cannot be differentiated from the other. I f one h a d ascended a n d three
were left behind, then w e would s a y t h a t he for some reason w a s a m a n
28
chosen a n d a m a n rejected, b u t one action applies to t h e m a l l .
F r o m this I h a v e t a u g h t y o u t h a t a foreigner cannot ascend M o u n t
Gerizim, or stand in the place of the Blessing. T h i s is a w a r n i n g to the
congregation of Israel t h a t no foreigner m a y appear a m o n g them. W h a t
shall w e s a y (on the other hand) about the sojourner or his son w h o
29
comes from the foreigner a c c i d e n t a l l y , seeing t h a t G o d said, " A s the
sojourner, so the n a t i v e " ( L e v . x i x . 3 4 ) ? H e further said, " L e t h i m
rejoice with y o u in y o u r pilgrimage" (Deut. x v i . 1 4 ) , a n d again H e said
concerning him, " H e shall gather w i t h y o u a n d hear the priest reading
the l a w " (Deut. x x x i . 1 1 - 1 2 ) , b u t he is not to read it himself.
I t is Israel's d u t y to perform all its service w i t h humility. T h u s the
Great One has said. T h a n k s be to the Powerful One w h o has given us
instruction, magnifying those w h o learn it a n d establishing t h e m in
their status a n d uplifting them. L e t us praise the Powerful One w h o
has thus fully privileged us, a n d let us submit before H i m in faith.
L e t us return to the words w e were discussing, for it w a s as though
30
w e s a w R e u b e n and Zebulun standing among the f o u r . H e a r some
thing t h a t will exalt y o u r mind, for R e u b e n seeks to utter his shame
(Gen. x l i x . 4) in his mouth, thereby giving w a r n i n g lest it should
happen again, a n d so that y o u m a y k n o w t h a t our L o r d is righteous;
H e is not a favourer of persons, w h e t h e r great or small.
Zebulun teaches too from his mouth w h a t happens to those w h o
w a n d e r — t h e y become scattered on the face of all the l a n d (Deut.
2 5
A marg. n. in Arabic in D. i suggests that the ref. here is to the Taheb. If so, Moses
may possibly be identified here with the Taheb, as in some later didactic compositions
2 8 A 2 7
in the later Liturgy. So . Ref. to the accoutrements of the Tabernacle. It
was regarded as the Taheb's function to restore these from their concealed place.
2 8
Ref. to the four tribes Asher, Gad, Dan, Naphtali who were descended from hand
2 9 A
maidens. So , but D. i has a marg. n. in Arabic that vDBa means 'secretly'.
8 0
Now Reuben & Zebulun (not descended from handmaids) are condemned for the
different reason that they were guilty of infamous iniquity as described in Gen. xlix.
9 8 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel III. §. 4
3 8 8 7
The two Targ. passages here vary slightly, the latter add. rp before nav. This
8 8 A
quotation as the second of those ref. to in n. 36. I.e. as 'their status*.
100 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel III. §. 4
3 9 4 0 A
The sacrifice of Isaac ? MSS (so ) r o .
III. §.4 T h e Blessing 101
4 1 A 4 2 4 3
'huge'. S.P. (& M.T.) plur. (Gen. viii. n ) . I.e. through his putrefying corpse.
1 4
For fiBnn. I.e. they were capable of understanding it.
102 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel III. §4
4 5 M A 4 7 4 8 A
ist half S.P., 2nd half Targ. 1. (beginning). Or 'possession'.
III. §4 T h e Blessing 103
§ 5. T H E C U R S E §. 5
6 9 8 0
Root I-it as Jew. Targ D. 1 marg. n. states that she functioned in the Beth
6 1
Mikhtash. For details of this legend v. the Asatir, III. 20 (p. 218). Presumably
A 6 2
the Cozbi of Num. xxv. 15, 18, but 'Ketiba'. nmriB? = SjviJI, possibly an ab
13
stract form from ns». For masmx, or Pe'il n v a s .
106 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel III. §-5
like in the w o r l d ? " D o not abandon the T r u e One, for G o d has
chosen y o u . Therefore w e cannot stop praising H i m a t all times
a n d on all occasions. L e t us g i v e t h a n k s to the Powerful One a n d
worship H i s greatness a n d b e submissive before H i m in w h a t w e
hear of H i m , a n d hasten to learn a n d not forsake H i m , b u t stand
in w h a t is obligatory for us.
R e u b e n arises a n d opens his m o u t h ; he utters the words of the
6 4
Curse, for I hear a m a n multiplying w o r d s and addressing u s , t h a t he
m a y receive a n a n s w e r t o w h a t R e u b e n said. S h a l l not someone else
8 5
s a y to u s , " Y o u do not need to examine this statement" ?
H e a r the a n s w e r of those w h o w e r e told w h a t he w a s told, of
those w h o heard w h a t he heard or did w h a t he did. E v e r y o n e does
w h a t is c u s t o m a r y in the world, so t h a t he k n o w s w h a t will be his
recompense. A m a n does not seek w h a t is not suitable for him — as
d i d K o r a h in seeking a status t h a t h a d not been granted to him.
See w h a t his recompense w a s — no need for further comment!
W h e n L e v i stood u p a n d b e g a n the Blessing, t h a t w a s his proper
prerogative, for w h i c h he h a d been appointed. S o n o w R e u b e n stands
u p a n d utters a statement of reproof to the congregation; to himself
he begins to speak. H e s a y s a w o r d . G o d revealed Himself a n d said
it w i t h m i g h t y mouth, Cursed be the man who makes a graven image
(Deut. x x v i i . 1 5 ; T a r g . ) or a n y likeness. H e seeks to m a k e it more
potent w i t h a curse. On M o u n t S i n a i H e said," You shall not make
yourself a graven image" ( E x . x x . 4; T a r g . ) . T h e y w e n t and m a d e
a calf! H e said, "Or any likeness"(ibid.). T h e y offered sacrifice and
worshipped B a a l P e o r !
H e r e H e m a k e s it more potent w i t h a curse, so t h a t there should
b e no deliverance for the one w h o m a k e s it. B u t G o d k n e w and
therefore informed the great prophet Moses t h a t H e w o u l d conceal
H i s F a v o u r from t h e m in v i e w of their evildoing. H e left t h e m to
their o w n desires. I f t h e y d i d this t h e y deserved the Curse. T h e
t w e l v e tribes stood to hear a n d t h e y k n e w t h a t this action w o u l d be
a b l o w to them, though it w a s only said of the doer, if he should do so.
W o e to us for it! T h e statement of J a c o b our father will not come
t o pass for us a t the last d a y s , for e v e r y tribe k n o w s both w h a t
will result form it a n d w h a t is to be the recompense for its action.
W o e to us n o w in this p l a c e ! W o u l d t h a t there w a s some act, or it
could b e some report, t h a t w e could mention in connection w i t h
the warning. W e fear t h a t it will not be so. Amen (Deut. x x v i i . 1 5 )
66
is the conclusion. I t represents t h r e e witnesses, just, great, m i g h t y —
67
d i v i n i t y , prophethood, priesthood; perhaps t h e y will be a r o u s e d .
8 4 A 8 5 1 A
1. p ? does not translate. 1. j ? ? does not translate. This whole
A 6 8
passage is fraught with difficulties and is confused. I.e. the letters of jn« re
8 7
present n'n^K, nmn & pnK. I.e. to make the Curse effective.
III. §.5 T h e Curse 107
6 8
The text here is not as the traditional S.P. text, but is rendered lit. 'be considerate'.
6 8 7 0 A
Lit. 'with the spirit of zeal'. 'we' better.
108 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel I I I . §.5
one regarding y o u r grandfather, one regarding y o u r grandmother,
w h o are dependent on y o u r fostering t h e m and on y o u r teaching
them, a n d one regarding J o s e p h a n d one regarding E p h r a i m — these
t w o being immensely g r e a t — a n d one regarding the angels and one
regarding the glory — T h e y h a v e perfected w h a t w a s done to Israel.
Consider each one of these; it has m a d e a statement of wisdom
w h i c h magnifies the learner of it.
H E A V E N s a i d : I suckle y o u w i t h good milk a n d in m y storehouse
there are good things from w h i c h y o u are supplied. D o not m a k e
m e a n g r y w i t h y o u , so as to bring v e r y severe punishment upon y o u .
A f t e r I h a v e p i t y for y o u , shall I l e a v e y o u grieving in the world
a n d forsaken? T h i s is w h a t I h e a r d about Cain w h e n he asked his
L o r d , " W h e r e shall I g o ? W h e r e shall I hide from T h i n e a n g e r ? "
H e w h o is rejected from l a n d to l a n d is not hidden from m e b y a n y
means. W h e r e shall a m a n go w h e n I g i v e d e w upon h i m ? W h e t h e r
in the open c o u n t r y or in the c i t y y o u stand beneath m e in exceedingly
great j u d g e m e n t .
E A R T H said: I a m the one w h o bore y o u , a n d I a t all times bring
forth for y o u m y glory, a n d a t all times establish for y o u y o u r expecta
tion of life. D o not l e a v e m e deprived. W h a t w o u l d establish y o u r
F o r m t h e n ? (If y o u do l e a v e me), I will manifest m u c h hostility
against y o u , so t h a t it will m a k e a n end of y o u in creation, a n d y o u
will be in affliction, w i t h o u t p i t y w h e n in distress, no deliverer w h e n
in j u d g e m e n t , no s a v i o u r w h e n cursed, no one to show m e r c y !
Chasten yourself o u t w a r d l y a n d i n w a r d l y a n d do not d r a w near to
do evil, lest y o u receive the Curse. H e w h o is cursed is rejected.
H e is never accepted, for in the place of forgiveness a n d in the place
of blessing witnesses h a v e been set u p to testify against the apos
t a t e w h o corrupt y o u r understanding of w h a t the statement means.
T h e s e will deliver witness in their m o u t h s of w h a t t h e y h a v e h e a r d
a n d will b e unable to escape from it.
W h e n H e a v e n a n d E a r t h h a d finished addressing the congregation,
H E A R T began, a n d addressed M I N D in a speech full of admonish
ment, one to the other, a n d B O D Y stood between t h e m in fear a n d
trembling a t w h a t t h e y w e r e s a y i n g .
71
M I N D said to H E A R T , " T a k e a grip of y o u r s e l f a n d restrain
yourself (in preparation for) w h a t y o u are going to h e a r ! A p p l y
y o u r m i n d ; do not deviate, so t h a t e v e r y t h i n g becomes confused
a n d the congregation b e in considerable distress. T h i s w o u l d not b e
r i g h t of y o u a n d y o u are not capable of it, lest destruction appear
a g a i n ; b u t it is in y o u r p o w e r to repel it from y o u . If y o u set yourself
7 1
Or Imper. Pe. of -my with prosthetic Alaf and so 'prepare yourself. 1. here as Ithpa.
of T B (for -rn).
i n . §.5 T h e Curse
7 2
Lit. 'be ill'. 7 3
So . This root (->b\) seems to = Bibl. Heb. TT'jt and Syr. Jl».
A
7 4 7 6 7 6 A 7 7
Lit. 'extinguishes'. The five senses. 1. s"? for -fj (so ) . Lit. 'stored
7 8 A
up' (after reaping), fig. from harvest. isi ? (for j).
110 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel I I I . §.5
7 9 8 0 8 1
v. n. i i 2 of text. I.e. flee from evil (as Gen. xxxix. 12). In his dream at Bethel
8 2 8 8 A
(Gen. xxviii). Or'possessors of the truth'. So .
I I I . §.5 T h e Curse i n
8 4 A 8 5
'apprehend'; cf. Bibl. Heb. root wip in Deut. xxii. 9. 8xXo?; ref. to Gen.
8 8 A 8 7
xxviii. 12. 'met'. Ref. to Gen. xxviii. 1 4 - 1 5 .
112 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel I I I . §.5
these actions a n d a p p l y y o u r m i n d ! D o not rebel (so as to depart)
from m e (or act) against me. D o not be i n v o l v e d in evil, t h a t y o u
m a y b e magnified b y y o u r L o r d a n d glorified b y me, for I w o u l d
m a k e a n end of y o u form the w o r l d of being (if y o u were to be so
involved), a n d I w o u l d bring upon y o u all kinds of curses and p u t
y o u in great affliction. If y o u discipline yourself o u t w a r d l y and
i n w a r d l y , secretly a n d manifestly, y o u will be in the world a b o v e ,
a n d a holy a n d select people. W h a t w a s promised to y o u r fathers
will b e effective for y o u , for our L o r d is merciful and pitiful. T h u s
H e described Himself ( E x . x x x i v . 6 ; D e u t . iv. 3 1 ) .
L e t u s g i v e t h a n k s a n d praise to the G r e a t One a n d worship H i s
d i v i n i t y a n d submit t o H i m a t all times a n d love H i m a l w a y s , for
H e is our M a k e r , Fashioner a n d Creator.
L e t the m i n d understand t h a t statement a n d hear it in great
faith a n d reverence, a n d hasten to praise G o d , to w h o m there is no
like. N o t h i n g exists for ever b u t H i s p o w e r — perchance glory m a y
continue for u s ! H e will deliver u s from this present evil, for H e gives
relief to those w h o love H i m a n d H e remembers them. L e t us s a y
w i t h fear a n d reverence, " T h e r e is only one G o d . "
T h e third w a r n i n g : Cursed be he who removes his neighbour's land
mark. And all the people shall say, 'Amen'. (Deut. x x v i i . 1 7 ; T a r g . ) .
Observe this statement a n d understand the inner meaning of it.
D o not deviate to right or left, for it contains ten important sections,
five w i t h reference to the priests, one to the princes, t w o to the
judges a n d t w o to the congregation. Praise be to H i m w h o said it,
w h o revealed to us this statement.
The five referring to the priests: L e t there be no alteration in the
performance of the ministration w h i c h G o d decreed for them. W h a t
is the recompense for altering if not affliction? F a r be it from the
priest to b e afflicted! W h a t has been apportioned to the priests in
e v e r y l a n d is according to their allotment from the good of Israel,
a n d w h a t has been given t h e m of the allotments y o u are to m a k e
a v a i l a b l e to each one according to his action. D o not leave him w i t h
out the b r e a d of his L o r d to eat. D o not lie against y o u r companion,
so t h a t he goes to his place a n d there is shame on him.
What was said to the princes: Observe h o w it is a n d learn it, t h a t y o u
m a y b e increased in wisdom. L e t no one rise to m a k e a false statement.
I t will become an adverse thing, self-destructive, a n d his companion's
8 8
place will b e a desolation, a n d it will b e given o v e r to him w h o
does not deserve it.
What was said to the judges: Consider h o w it is a n d learn it w i t h all
y o u r ability. Y o u will prosper in e v e r y deed if y o u are not partial to
8 8 A
So ; usually = 'plucked up'.
H I . 15 T h e Curse "3
8 9
the poor or defer to the rich ( L e v . x i x . 1 5 ) . Y o u r status w o u l d decrease
(if y o u did) a n d y o u w o u l d receive retribution from m e for t h a t .
What was said to the congregation: T a k e note of it a n d increase y o u r
knowledge thereby, t h a t y o u m a y b e exalted. M a k e it a shield before
y o u , to repel from y o u e v e r y t h i n g evil. I t is the statement w h i c h
H e wrote before y o u : But you shall love your neighbour as yourself
( L e v . x i x . 1 8 ; T a r g . ) , to b e a t all times a t peace. T h i s is the end of
w h a t w a s said to us. S e t it before y o u as an illumining light.
A p p l y y o u r mind. D o not alter these statements, so t h a t some
deficiency occurs. (If y o u do) y o u will be in distress. L e t y o u r heart
not lie in y o u r possessions so as to m a k e it h a r d . (If y o u do) I will
deprive y o u of all t h a t y o u possess. L e t y o u r e y e not c o v e t w h a t
belongs to y o u r neighbour. T h a t w o u l d b e a sin on y o u r p a r t . Y o u are
not to t a k e w h a t belongs to a L e v i t e . I a m j u d g e for y o u ! Y o u are
not to raise the voice against a priest in y o u r S a n c t u a r y . I a m his
portion a n d y o u will fall (if y o u do). D o not use y o u r p o w e r against
three classes of p o o r — t h e person in p o v e r t y , the orphan a n d the w i d o w .
I n m y p o w e r I a m superior to y o u ! T h e r e are five things, in w h i c h
y o u h a v e no part, y o u are not to request: if y o u seek w e a l t h I w i l l
m a k e y o u poor; if y o u t a k e into y o u r possession w h a t h a s not been
m a d e yours, if y o u seek increase a b o v e w h a t y o u possess, if y o u do
an injustice such as d e n y i n g the t r u t h or raising y o u r h a n d or restrain
9 0
i n g y o u r words, if y o u love yourself — all evil! A n d I will recompense
y o u for it!
9 1
If y o u take outstretched h a n d s in y o u r s , if y o u do a n y t h i n g b y
yourself t h a t afflicts, if y o u seek increase over a n d a b o v e w h a t y o u
a l r e a d y possess, I will impoverish y o u . If y o u deal iniquitously,
I will be a just j u d g e ! If y o u r w o r d s are restrained, then I will in a
twinkling bring about y o u r destruction. I f y o u love yourself in (your)
evildoing, I will loathe a n d destroy it. M y great p o w e r does not s h o w
f a v o u r unless to bring about the truth.
I h a v e not left this statement unqualified, for I h a v e reinforced
it w i t h a curse, so t h a t y o u will not deviate a n d find yourself in
punishment. A s for him w h o dies therein, I will e x a c t vengeance
on h i m ! If he thought he could deal in secret, none of his deeds is
concealed from me, for to m e the concealed is just as the revealed.
N o deed done is concealed from me.
L e t us all k n o w this m y s t e r y a n d not turn from it. Praise be to
H i m w h o s a y s a n d does all H e wills. L e t us g i v e t h a n k s to the P o w e r
ful One a n d submit to H i s greatness, a n d testify, s a y i n g , " T h e r e is
only one G o d . "
8 9
As S.P., but -rnv for bni (perhaps not intended to be part of the quotation).
9 0 9 1
I.e. for purposes of deception ? I.e. take the needy into your greedy grasp for
purposes of exploitation.
ii4 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel I I I . §.6
§.6 § 6. S O C I A L E T H I C S
W e now set forth as it were a l a m p w h i c h shines before us and
dispels all darkness, for its brilliance appears a n d makes us strong
in great knowledge — good for those w h o possess it. See the inner
meaning of this great statement a n d t a k e hold of it. D o not ever
turn from it.
Cursed be he who misleads a blind man on the road, and all the -people
92
shall say, 'Amen' (Deut. x x v i i . i 8 ) w i t h loud voice. T h i s statement
comprises t w e l v e c o m m a n d m e n t s . Observe a n d consider them.
93
T h i s s t a t e m e n t does not refer to h i m w h o is blind in sight, b u t to
the m a n w h o sees a n d hears!
I n the case of a m a n w h o asks about truth, his question is not to
remain u n a n s w e r e d ; in the case of a m a n w h o seeks to enquire about
knowledge, do not l e a v e h i m w i t h o u t instruction; in the case of a
m a n w h o goes a s t r a y in the w a y of evil, do not desert him — (if y o u
94
did) y o u w o u l d bear his b u r d e n ; I n the case of a m a n w h o makes
a declaration of foul accusation, do not rejoice a t him or y o u will
h a v e to bear his burden. I n the case of a m a n w h o carries some
95 9 6
shameful s t a t e m e n t , some ill rumour, do not forgive h i m and I
97
will not hesitate to destroy him. I n the case of a m a n w h o is c a u g h t
in his guilt a n d w h o does not realize the significance of it, turn him
from his w a y . I n the case of a m a n w h o leaves himself devoid of
knowledge, do not be glad for h i m in this. I n the case of a m a n w h o
hastens to b e in evil, turn h i m from his w a y and prevent him from
the judgement. I n the case of a m a n w h o utters statements w h i c h
he does n o t understand a n d he suffers reproach, turn him to the
t r u t h . I n the case of a m a n w h o is in a place of desolation and does
not realize h o w it is, turn h i m from t h a t place. I n the case of a m a n
w h o teaches y o u something he himself does not know, acquaint him
w i t h the truth a n d do not let him go a s t r a y . I n the case of a m a n w h o
does not k n o w the real meaning of w h a t he is doing, direct him to the
t r u t h a n d receive his hire.
If there is none of these above-mentioned w h o will listen or change
his w a y s , I will b e a just j u d g e ! H e will be turned a w a y from the
Blessing a n d will abide in the Curse. I n this w o r l d I will recompense
h i m for w h a t e v e r deed, according to w h a t he has done.
If a m a n asks about the t r u t h a n d listens to the answer, but does
not derive instruction, I will t a k e vengeance on him. If a m a n establi
shes himself in righteousness a n d the t r u t h is revealed to him, b u t
h e does not perceive it, he is not really righteous and is not w o r t h y
9 2 9 3 A
As S.P., but na» for Dsn. For nn^n ? ** So ; i.e. 'be responsible for his
9 5 A 9 6
guilt'. According to something said that is mere hearsay. Or 'accept it'.
9 7 A
So more specifically.
III. §.6 Social E t h i c s "5
98
of mention. H e lives in a w r e t c h e d s t a t e during his life a n d in his
death; I will never accept his petition from h i m , for he is worse t h a n
Pharaoh w h e n he asked the great prophet Moses, " W h o is the L o r d ? " —
a genuine question, b u t w h e n the light w a s revealed to h i m he again
asked, " W h o is the L o r d ? " H i s evil m i n d devised evil! S o I dealt
w i t h him b y manifesting e v e r y wonder, turning his m i n d a s it w a s
turned a t the beginning.
If a m a n is set upon knowledge, teach him. If he learns, his doings
will be good, b u t if his doings are lies the Curse will be upon him —
I a m too righteous for him. T a k e note of his recompense a n d w h a t
I will do to h i m ! H e will find himself in v e r y great accursedness;
in his last state he will be severely recompensed.
If a m a n w a l k s in an evil w a y w i t h o u t realizing it, a n d y o u desert
him, y o u will bear the sentence of the Curse, a n d he will h a v e to
turn from it himself because y o u did not turn h i m . If he does not
turn from it or listen to y o u w h e n y o u told h i m , it will rebound
on him. I f he does not turn from it or listen to y o u r w o r d s , see w h a t
m y power will recompense him, placing h i m a m o n g the creatures in
great a n d severe retribution. I a m too righteous for h i m !
If a m a n utters a corrupt statement, k n o w i n g w h a t he does, I will
judge him. Y o u need not reprove h i m a m o n g men, for I will reprove
him w i t h m a n y calamities. I f he did not realize w h a t he w a s s a y i n g
and if he learns from y o u , h a p p y are y o u a n d he alike! If he w a s
a w a r e of w h a t he w a s s a y i n g , b u t did not understand the statements
made, the truth will be r e m o v e d from h i m a n d the Curse will be upon
9 9
h i m ! On Mount Sinai I w a r n e d of it a n d decreed t h a t this should
never happen. N o w I h a v e b o u n d h i m w i t h a curse.
N o deceiver in the w o r l d h a s a n y future. A corrupter of men is a
corrupter of the L o r d , for he h a s denied H i m . B e c a u s e of the m a g n i
tude of w h a t he s a y s , he has no future before me. I will erase his
m e m o r y from under h e a v e n , because he disobeyed m y c o m m a n d .
I will destroy his life.
I n the case of a m a n w h o utters a shameful statement a n d does
not verify the truth of it, I will recompense h i m , so t h a t no m a n
100
will w a l k in his p l a c e ; if he w a l k s in the w a y of t r u t h , it is w e l l
101
w i t h him. I f he does not learn, he is s h a m e f u l ; he will b e slain in
the judgement.
102
T h e m a n w h o is in his sin, even if it w a s w i t h o u t i n t e n t , the sin
is not forgiven, for it w a s m a d e k n o w n to h i m a n d he turned from
103
the instruction. W e a k m i n d e d n e s s does not bring about all the
9 8 9 9 A 1 0 0 A 1 0 1 A
Or 'calamity". So ; lit. 'seal him'. i. - , ' f r him'.
n So
n : j a t e
or == Targ. Jon. nn'K (Deut. i. 6) 'today', in which case render 'If he does
1 0 2 A 1 0 3 A
not learn dotay, he will be . . ' . So ; cf. Syr. ^ ^ o . So for Wp.
n6 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel III. §.6
distress. I t is the sin t h a t y o u do. J u d g e m e n t appears in e v e r y
generation.
H e w h o lets (his) adultery be seen shall b e punished, because he
manifested his evil, unable to hide it, a n d e v e r y m a n will be a w a r e
of his sin a n d shun h i m . H i s repentance will be accepted. If a m a n
sees a thief h e is not to shun h i m ; if he does shun him, he k n o w s
104
about t h i s .
T h e r e is no sin e x c e p t w h e r e I h a v e t a u g h t y o u about it beforehand.
I t m a k e s the heart unclean a n d defiles the mind, a n d it turns a m a n
from honour to dishonour a n d places him in a state of infamy. H e
sees a light, b u t cannot w a l k b y it. I f such a thing is done highhanded
l y , I will stretch forth m y h a n d a n d s l a y h i m b y m y power, a n d
place h i m in severe retribution. T h e r e will be no escape for him from
it ever.
A m a n w h o turns from knowledge, if he seeks a n d y o u do not
teach him, it is j u s t a s I said to y o u ; y o u will be responsible for that.
If he does not seek a n d he forsakes knowledge, the consequences
w i l l rebound on him.
A m a n w h o hastens to do evil, if h e w a s in his right mind, will
receive the Curse. H i s sin is considerable because h e did something
t h a t provokes m y greatness. I w i l l deal w i t h h i m just as he intended
to do t o his good brethren. If h e m a d e himself a n evildoer, he will
find himself in sore distress; I will m a k e an end of him, a n d there
will b e no m e m o r y left of h i m in the world.
If a m a n utters w o r d s he d i d not understand a n d t h e y are state
ments of s h a m e , the m e a n i n g of w h i c h h e does not understand, and
y o u left h i m w i t h o u t instructing h i m in w h a t h a s been pronounced
before y o u , it shall b e indeed y o u r responsibility, b u t if he refused to
listen to the instruction, he shall be accursed and y o u are in the clear.
Observe the statements he makes, not k n o w i n g their real meaning,
a n d a p p l y y o u r m i n d ! L e t t h e m not be a m a t t e r for belief on y o u r
p a r t a n d do not heed them, nor hold b y t h e m — the statements of
soothsayers, diviners, sorcerers, astrologers, those w h o m a k e their
sons a n d daughters to pass through fire, those w h o worship idols,
105
those w h o practise c h a r m s , m e d i u m s a n d w i z a r d s a n d n e c r o m a n c e r s —
of all these rid yourself w i t h all y o u r might, for there is no a d v a n t a g e
in them.
A m a n w h o dwells in a w h o l l y desolate place a n d suffers h a r m b y
living there, a n d he does not himself realize it, consider t h a t place
a n d realize h o w it is the place of a n alien god, against w h i c h H e
categorically w a r n e d on Mount Sinai, a n d w h i c h H e quite explicitly
io* A 'punishes' or 'is punished'. If Aram, correct, then the man who saw the thief has
1 0 5
become an accessory after the fact. Cf. Deut. xviii. 10—n.
III. §.6 Social E t h i c s 117
§ 7. O N S E X U A L O F F E N C E S §. 7
1 1 8
W e set forth a section, w h o l l y pleasing, before w e enter the t o w n .
A t both beginning a n d end the G r e a t One reproved. H e m a d e a
statement which is w h o l l y beneficial in this w o r l d a n d the next,
warning against the doing of evil. I t consists of ten shameful a c t s .
1 1 6 1 1 1 A
All this from Gen. xxxv. 22. So ; 1. "nn ? The persons are mixed in the MSS
in this passage.
I I I . §. 7 On S e x u a l Offences 121
1 1 8 1 1 9
117 A 'judgement*. Lit.'proper condition*. I.e. Lev. xx. 17.
122 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel HI. §§.7.8
§ 8. J U D G E M E N T S O N E V I L M O T I V E S
O men, come a n d fill y o u r minds w i t h w h a t is set out before y o u
of true utterance, w h o l l y beneficial.
Cursed be he who slays his neighbour in secret (Deut. x x v i i . 2 4 ) . H e w h o
lies a w a i t for someone on the w a y in order to strike him down like
a n accursed serpent enters into the Curse. H e w h o a t t a c k s his neigh
b o u r in secret or drives him from his belief passes under the Curse.
H e w h o sees his neighbour go in a w r o n g w a y a n d does not bring him
b a c k comes under the Curse. H e w h o k n o w s t h a t his neighbour is
going in the p a t h of a dangerous w i l d beast a n d does not tell him,
deserves the Curse for t h a t a n d is responsible for his sin; his L o r d
is a n g r y w i t h h i m a n d H e will never pardon him.
L e t us w a r n ourselves against such action a n d turn from being
i n v o l v e d in it, for w e are the sons of good men w h o loved the T r u e One,
w h o kept the covenant, w h o forsook evil. L e t us not w a n d e r from
their w a y ever. L e t us b e w h e r e t h e y are a n d g i v e thanks to our L o r d ,
w h o h a s thus endowed us, a n d m a g n i f y H i s greatness a l w a y s , and
s a y continually, " T h e r e is only one G o d . "
§ 9. T H E C U R S E O N D I S O B E D I E N C E
W e set out a large section a n d contemplate this last statement,
w h i c h comprises all the manifold w a r n i n g s for the priests a n d the
122
L e v i t e s a n d princes a n d tribes a n d o f f i c e r s a n d overseers and the
E l d e r s a n d the judges a n d finally the congregation — a statement
t h a t endures for ever.
Cursed be he who does not confirm all the words of this law by doing them
(Deut. x x v i i . 2 6 ; T a r g . ) .
123
Men h a v e said t h a t the statement appertains to this s e c t i o n
a n d t h e y h a v e m a d e their evidence H i s statement a t the beginning —
And the priest shall execute upon her all this law ( N u m . v . 3 0 ; T a r g . ) .
I t is said on the other h a n d t h a t the one is not like the other, for
m a n y c o m m a n d m e n t s are spoken concerning them, the l a w of the
b u r n t offering, of commission, of the sin offering, the guilt offering,
of peace offerings. T h i s l a w includes them — as H e said, "This law",
as well as the explicit statement t h a t follows it.
H e said further concerning the affliction of leprosy, "This is the
124
law for a leprous disease" ( L e v . xiii. 59). S o w i t h menstruation
a n d menstrual uncleanness a n d Passover. T h i s l a w includes all these
a n d it is that w h i c h the great prophet Moses w r o t e a n d g a v e to the
priests w h o bore the a r k of the L o r d ' s covenant a n d to all the E l d e r s
of Israel. H e w h o alters a statute of it enters into the Curse. H e w h o
breaks a fence enters into the Curse. H e w h o is w a r n e d b y a priest
of m y w o r d s a n d disobeys enters into the Curse. H e w h o is directed
b y a j u d g e a n d rebels, enters into the Curse. H e w h o makes himself
a n e n e m y to G o d enters into the Curse in this w o r l d a n d will suffer
v e r y severe retribution in the n e x t .
W o e to u s if w e suffer b y our o w n doing w h a t destroys us. W h a t
evil affliction w e w o u l d be in! W e w o u l d h a v e no p o w e r to endure
it. W h a t severe c a l a m i t y w e w o u l d fall into, a n d w e would h a v e no
p o w e r to endure it. W h a t great conflagration w e would be p u t in
a n d w e w o u l d h a v e no p o w e r to endure its flames. W h a t severe
1 2 6 1 2 6 A
From this thought came the word Fanuta, i.e. Divine Disfavour. (y>) u
126 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel I I I . §§-9,io
§ 10. I N S T R U C T I O N S TO T H E L E A D E R S OF I S R A E L
W e set out a large a n d important section where w e see how the
great prophet Moses a n d the L e v i t i c a l priests ended all these words
w i t h all Israel w h i c h h a v e preceded, a n d where w e see how he called
1 2 7
the princes a n d all of them c a m e q u i c k l y to h i m .
H e began b y s a y i n g to them, " P a y attention to hear w h a t brings
1 2 8
benefit. Y o u are t h e y w h o m G o d h a s chosen, a holy and select
people, out of all the nations. M y L o r d h a s commanded m e to do so
a n d H e h a s appointed J o s h u a also w i t h the princes, for he is one of
them. T h u s H e said to the tribe of E p h r a i m , "Joshua the son of Nun"
( N u m . x x v i i . 1 8 ) . A t this j u n c t u r e he placed his h a n d upon him (Num.
x x v i i . 2 3 ; T a r g . ) t o m a g n i f y him. W h o are the princes w h o m Moses
c o m m a n d e d a n d of w h o m he said, "One leader each day" (Num. vii.
1 1 ) ? T h e y are the ones w h o m he assembled w i t h great might.
See h o w great is the status of the great prophet Moses a n d m a g n i f y
the Powerful One w h o appointed him o v e r all. W h e n the status of
J o s h u a w a s high, see the manifold glories that were done for him.
W h a t did G o d proclaim w i t h regard to commissioning, b u t that
J o s h u a should bring about deliverance (cf. D e u t . x x x i . 1 4 ) ? Moses
d i d not l a y his h a n d on a n y m a n b u t J o s h u a , exalting him in status.
H e m a d e him to b e entrusted over all the congregation. Therefore
129
H e said, "And he laid his hands upon him, and commissioned him"
( N u m . x x v i i . 2 3 ) . H e further said in connection w i t h him, "Full of
the spirit of wisdom, for Moses had laid his hands upon him" (Deut.
x x x i v . 9).
T e n times he exalted the mention of h i m : when he slew A m a l e k
a n d his people it w a s said of him, "And recite it in the ears of Joshua"
1 2 7
This and the sequel a series of addresses apparently based on Deut. xxix. ioff.,
1 2 8 A 1 2 8
midrashic in nature. MSS rirw na, so uf. So M.T. S.P. sing.
III. §.IO Instructions to the L e a d e r s of Israel 127
1 3 0 1 8 1 A 1 3 2 A
For 'BOJ. So . 'Mammon' (Greek, as in Jew. Targ.), but 'a cover'.
128 Book I I I T h e N e w S t a t u s of Israel I I I . §.io
133 A f the sages. This small section seems to be misplaced, as the command to the
0
A
teachers (not scribes, according to ) follows the command to the Elders below.
1 8 1 1 8 6 1 3 8 1 8 7
Root 'in. Part S.P., part Targ. v. n. 133. This twofold activity
of the rriDO seems to suggest that they were scribes and teachers as in the N.T.,
A
but always renders the word simply by ovJLU (teachers) or .is^JI (sages).
III. §.IO Instructions t o the L e a d e r s of Israel 129
1 2 3
The introductory formula from K only. Ref. to Num. x. 1. Ref. to Num. v. 1.
134 Book I V God, Man and Sin IV. §.i
4
I shall increase w i s d o m for y o u , t h a t y o u m a y k n o w the p u r p o s e
behind the w o r d W A Y Y E D A B B E R . H e used W A Y Y E D A B B E R
to the prophetic one in his fasting a n d weariness, so t h a t he attained
a high status such as no one else has ever a t t a i n e d — t w e n t y - t w o
corresponding to t w e n t y - t w o w h i c h Moses w r o t e on the stones,
5
w h i c h are a t the beginning of this w o r d W . Y . D . B . R . I t w a s the seal,
for t h e y w e r e concealed until Moses the prophet c a m e and G o d
revealed t h e m through him. E v e r y c o m m a n d m e n t is reinforced b y
8
W A Y Y E D A B B E R a n d e v e r y blessing—-B.R. —strengthened b y it.
If it h a d not been for Moses all this w o u l d not h a v e been k n o w n
a n d nothing w o u l d h a v e been declared of w h a t w a s sent down. T h e
Creation too w a s established b y it a n d all t h a t w a s done w a s b y its
enumeration. W . represents the six d a y s , w h i c h were a storehouse
for all t h a t w a s created. Y . ' s v a l u e is revealed before y o u — n o need
to repeat it here. D . — b y it the heavens w e r e perfected and b y B .
e v e r y glorious thing w a s magnified in the world, both the opening
7
a n d closing of i t — o f w h a t h a d passed a n d of w h a t w a s y e t to come.
I n the beginning it closed a n d it opened. I t closed w h a t h a d passed
a n d it opened w h a t w a s y e t to come.
W h e n the T e n W o r d s w e r e sent d o w n on t w o tablets, it w a s to
open a n d to close, to open u p the truth a n d to close the gate of evil
a n d m a k e an end of e n m i t y (to G o d ) . W h e n this w o r d ( W A Y Y E D
A B B E R ) w a s said b y the T r u e One, there w a s conjoined w i t h it
the w o r d L ' E M O R , for it w a s from the presence of G o d clinching
the action (as it were). T h u s the great prophet Moses said W A Y Y E D
A B B E R ... M O S E H a n d d i d not s a y L ' E M O R in this proclamation
8
of h i s .
W h e n G o d proclaimed the T e n W o r d s H e said L ' E M O R ( E x . x x . i ) ,
a d d i n g force to H i s proclamation. H e said, "And God spoke ( W A Y Y E D
A B B E R ) all these words, saying ( L ' E M O R ) " (ibid.). I n one case H e
said W A Y Y E D A B B E R M O S E H , a n d W A Y Y E D A B B E R E L O H I M
H e strengthened w i t h the w o r d L ' E M O R ; in the other case H e said
W A Y Y E D A B B E R M O S E H w i t h o u t strengthening it w i t h the w o r d
L ' E M O R . H e honours him because of his pre-eminence over mankind.
9
I t w a s revealed a n d set as a foundation , w h o l l y advantageous.
S o the great prophet Moses said here (Deut. x x x i . 30) W A Y Y E D
A B B E R M O S E H , a strong foundation t h a t will never be destroyed!
H e further said, "In the ears of all the assembly of Israel"(ibid.), for
4 A 5
naxn xn, L . nxanxn ( L j>>JI), K -no ( K * »_,*), i.e. var. for nxwi ? The 2nd
'twenty-two' seems to ref. to the letters of the Alphabet (see Book VI. § 3 for Marqah's
6
discussion on Moses and the writing on the tablets). I.e. the first two letters of n a i a .
7
I.e. BIT is the first letter of the Bible (in rnsxia) and it is the last letter of aio,
which occurs at the end of the sections dealing with each day (so Gen. i. 4, 10, 12, 18,
8 9
20, 25, 31a). I.e. in Deut. xxxi. 30. Or 'form' (Sejia?) or 'structure' (86[xo<;) ?
IV. §.i T e a c h i n g p r e p a r a t o r y to the S o n g of Moses 135
at the beginning of the proclamation G o d h a d said to Moses, "Gather
for me seventy men of the elders" ( N u m . x i . 1 6 ; T a r g . ) .
A problem arises here concerning the statement of the great prophet
Moses, "That I may speak" (Deut. x x x i . 2 8 ) t o all the congregation.
Observe w h a t the statement means. W h e n H e proclaimed the T e n
W o r d s , it w a s at the time of the meeting of G o d a n d Moses. T h u s H e
said, "That the people may hear when I speak with you" ( E x . x i x . 9;
T a r g . ) , to witness y o u r greatness a m o n g all the congregation. W h e n
H e finished the proclamation H e again said, " A n d all the people heard".
Faithful are the men w h o h a v e been chosen—they are s e v e n t y
men from the E l d e r s of the people! T h u s H e said, "And I will take
10
some of the spirit which is upon you and put it upon them" ( N u m . x i .
1 7 ; T a r g . ) . because it w a s said to him, "And let them take their stand
there with you" ( N u m . x i . 1 6 ; T a r g . ) in the T e n t of Meeting. L e t no
m a n speak except one like h i m ! S i n c e their status w a s high, t h e y
were w o r t h y to speak w i t h them. T h e statement w a s m a d e t o them
and t h e y w o u l d learn a n d then speak to all the congregation, w h o
w o u l d listen.
E x a l t e d is the mind of the great prophet Moses for w h a t he t a u g h t
and revealed to all the congregation of Israel!
W h e r e is there a n y o n e like Moses and w h o c a n c o m p a r e w i t h
Moses the prophet, the like of w h o m has not arisen a n d never
will arise ?
W h e r e is there a n y o n e like Moses a n d w h o c a n compare w i t h
Moses, to w h o m his L o r d revealed w h a t H e h a d never before
revealed to a n y m a n ?
W h e r e is there a n y o n e like Moses a n d w h o c a n compare w i t h
Moses, w h o w a s strengthened w i t h m u c h w i s d o m from the
light of the D i v i n e One ?
W h e r e is there a n y o n e like Moses a n d w h o c a n compare w i t h
Moses, w h o m his L o r d entrusted over H i s possession ?
W h e r e is there a n y o n e like Moses a n d w h o can compare w i t h
Moses, for whose sake manifold wonders were revealed ?
G r e a t is the m i g h t y prophet Moses and w h a t he said in t h a t address,
which is wholly life(-giving). E v e r y w o r d of it, which his mouth
1 1
glorified, increased him in wisdom a t the mention of the n a m e
of his L o r d , when he began a n d said mightily H A S 5 T R A H A Z Z O T
( T H I S S O N G — D e u t . x x x i . 3 0 ) . H e did not s a y T H I S L A W a n d
he taught all the congregation of Israel t h a t it contained all things.
H e said H A S S l R A and further H A Z Z O T .
Observe the importance of the t w o . H e w a s increased in k n o w l
edge, in which there w a s no specification except the c a r r y i n g out
1 0 A 1 1 A
'prophecy'. So .
136 Book I V God, Man and Sin IV. §.i
U N T I L T H E Y W E R E F I N I S H E D ('AD T U M M A M )
1 2 1 8 1 4 1 5 1 8
I.e. rai rma. YUD = 10. ZEN = 7. I.e. DTI^K. I.e. T-nvn.
1 7 1 8 A
Cf. Heb. iii. 5, 6 and v. further the discussion of Trotter, op. cit. B u t 'perpetual,
1 9
lasting', as if re ading -pan. I.e. before Gerar (Gen.xx. 1).
IV. §.i Teaching p r e p a r a t o r y to the S o n g of Moses 137
him ,and he did not refuse. G o d magnified him a n d g a v e h i m three
20
great blessings.
J a c o b w a s magnified w i t h t w o of t h e m ; not all of them w e r e g i v e n
to him, b u t it w a s said of him, "While Jacob was a perfect (TAM)
2 1 2 2
man" (Gen. x x v . 2 7 ) . T h e great prophet Moses said it w i t h o u t Y U D ,
thus making known t h a t it w a s said to N o a h in the mouth of the
D i v i n e One.
W h e n he said T H I S S O N G in prophetic language, he said T U M M A M
and not T A M I M A . H e m a d e k n o w n t w o important things, the w o r d
' A D and w h a t it consisted of, the words it represents a n d w h a t t h e y
pertain to.
E x a l t e d is the great prophet Moses w h o h a s revealed to us w o r d s
that are wholly life(-giving). C r o w n e d w i t h these m i g h t y things
that he revealed, he opened his mouth in blessing a n d uttered a b u n
dant thanks, a n d he illumined the w o r l d over all the congregation.
W h e r e is there a prophet like Moses a n d w h o can compare with
2 3
Moses, the servant of G o d , the son of the House of G o d ?
W h e r e is there a prophet like Moses a n d w h o c a n c o m p a r e with
Moses, w h o addressed his L o r d like friend w i t h f r i e n d ?
W h e r e is there a prophet like Moses a n d w h o can compare with
Moses, to w h o m his L o r d appeared in a revelation a n d g a v e to him
H i s autograph ?
W h e r e is there a prophet like Moses a n d w h o can compare with
2 4
Moses, whose n a m e w a s m a d e the n a m e of his L o r d ?
2 5 A 2 8 A
I. TS (q. i.). So ; 1. srai with L. Cf. Arabic L>-, recoil, shrink, in view of
2 7 2 8
the sequel. Or 'the charge'. Each of these items is extracted from 'Sabbath'
2 9 A
passages in the Pentateuch. Root mm; 5~Jii-j*c, 'not diminishing'.
IV. §.2 On Creation 139
§ 2. O N C R E A T I O N §.2
T h e T E N F O U N D A T I O N S t h a t are revealed in Genesis stood
there to magnify and also to perfect. G r e a t is this prophet the like
of w h o m has not arisen since A d a m a n d never will arise!
See how it is in Genesis a n d number the letters—six—like the six
d a y s , for each one resembles the other; and the n a m e w h i c h brought
all created things into being sealed the whole. Therefore H e said,
"God finished" (Gen. ii. 2 ) . B E R E S T T w a s the starting-point a n d
30
God finished (ibid. T a r g . ) . A l s o the six d a y s , S a b b a t h a n d holiness.
Therefore the great prophet Moses proclaimed a t the beginning K I
31
( F O R ) . Since these things c a m e in the name (ibid.) K I b e c a m e the
medium of prophethood. B E R E S T T is a beginning; so K I is a beginn
ing, a n d G o d is in the beginning a n d a t the end, for it is w i t h H i s
name t h a t he is vested a n d strengthened. Therefore he b e g a n b y
saying, For in the name (ibid.).
N o t e the greatness of his knowledge. W h a t he did in the name is
a m y s t e r y ; it established the glory w i t h which his L o r d vested him.
T h e L o r d said it of the F o r m of A d a m , for b y it it w a s established;
b y G o d it w a s perfected.—Then the Lord God formed man (Gen. ii.7).
For I will proclaim in the name of the Lord (Deut. x x x i i . 3) is a renewal
of the mention in Genesis, a n d the n a m e w i t h which he w a s vested
a n d the great name whose secret he taught. Moses w a s magnified
mightily in knowledge, wholly of faith. T h e secret of Genesis—know
h o w it is; the great n a m e ( Y H W H ) a n d the w o r d K I were heard
from the mouth of Moses.
T h e mouth of the D i v i n e One a n d t h a t of the prophetic one w e r e
alike. W e h a v e seen a w o r d which the T r u e One w r o t e — B A R A \
1
W h a t is its m e a n i n g ? H e wrote In the beginning ... created ( B A R A )
(Gen. i. 1 ) , and Moses a t his beginning said, "For in the name" (Deut.
x x x i i . 3). B A R A ' w a s said because the T r u e One there planned a n d
created b y His will, and Moses said in his great knowledge, " / will
32
proclaim" (ibid.), just like the w o r d B A R A ' .
Genesis comprises the six d a y s and all the c o m m a n d m e n t s t h a t
were written in the law. Praise be to the L o r d of the w o r l d w h o
endures alone and never changes!
Ascribe greatness to our God (Deut. x x x i i . 3; T a r g . ) . T h e great
prophet Moses made it the g a t e w a y to all praises. I n it is contained
Genesis, as well as w h a t is like it. W.represents the six d a y s a n d e v e r y -
3 0 A
The Aram. plur. for 'God' is rare in Sam. literature. 'the power', rrenna not un
commonly occurs in later literature as personified to an extent, but without Gnostic
3 1
connotation. The normal ascription in the Sam. liturgy, at the heading of all
services, likewise of all books (as the Muslim *ul|»—j). The form is always otsa (so
3 2 1
S.P.) for the urn of M.T. It appears that QARA' is here related to BARA .
140 Book I V God, Man and Sin IV. §.2
T H E R O C K (Deut. x x x i i . 4)
3 3
The letters of iam: W . = 6; H. from nvr? B . = 2; W. (the 2nd) regarded as the
3 4 3 5 A
tailpiece. Or ism, imper. plur. root -pn. I.e. rnso rra (schoolhouse), ^1 ^>j.
IV. §.2 O n Creation 141
a n d again he said, "And let the earth hear" (ibid.). T w o other elements
36
he began to call; t h e y are s t o r e s — w i n d a n d fire.
I t is good to endure to do as he did. good to enter into t h e service
of his L o r d . F i r e is p a r t a n d parcel of all created things, since a t t h e
Creation it w a s an element for e v e r y t h i n g . T h e whole w a s formed
37
from four elements, each one increased in its g e n u s during the c r e a t i v e
process—water of four sorts, dust of four sorts, w i n d of four sorts
a n d fire of four sorts.
See h o w the elements of w a t e r are d i v i d e d into four t y p e s : go to the
3 8
G a r d e n a n d see w h a t t h e divisions are—one m a d e s w e e t a n d its c h a n g
ed state, a n d one m a d e bitter a n d its later state. S o fire is in this
condition; in the S a n c t u a r y it w a s m a d e so, a s on the candlestick.
A a r o n produced it well from the fire on the a l t a r , w h i c h is perpetual,
3 9
never extinguished ( L e v . v i . 9). S o the fire w h i c h is for the B u r n i n g ,
of w h i c h it is said, "Fire from the Lord" ( L e v . i x . 2 4 ; T a r g . ) . Therefore
no other k i n d of fire enters into t h e S a n c t u a r y . W h e n it is b r o u g h t
into being it causes a great reflection (of light). T h e fire w h i c h t h e sons
of A a r o n m a d e on the a l t a r w a s p u t out w h e n t h e great prophet Moses
p r a y e d to H i m ( N u m . x i . 2 ) .
D u s t too is of four categories: the dust of the earth, t h e d u s t of the
Garden, the dust from the s k y , a n d the d u s t w h i c h is in t h e p a v e d
court of the S a n c t u a r y .
W i n d likewise is of four categories: the w i n d from before the L o r d ,
4 0
the E a s t w i n d , the W e s t w i n d , a n d the w i n d t h a t b l o w s .
L e t us m a g n i f y our L o r d a n d b e h u m b l e before H i s greatness and
believe in H i m a n d Moses H i s prophet, W h o used t h e phrase The Rock
a n d conjoined it w i t h the w o r d Perfect (in D e u t . x x x i i . 4 ) .
4 1
F r o m the F o r m a n d the m i n d w a s the b o d y perfected a n d set u p
(in a manner) quite a p a r t from a n y other created thing. Therefore T .
(cf T A M I M ) here becomes an element. T . magnifies all perfection.
H e p u t Y . in the middle (of the M I M ' s ) ; as for the t w o M . ' s , the first
4 2
M. represents the elements of Creation a n d the T e n W o r d s a n d t h e
w o r d s of the covenant a n d of mercies. T h e second M . is the n u m b e r of
3 8
Lit. 'heaps'. The raw materials for creation were held to be heaped up before their
3 7 3 8
use during the great Silence (MaStoq). y£vo?. I.e. living, running water. The
contrast here is between running (sweet) and standing (stagnant and sour) water, as
A
further exemplified in Jer. ii. 13. non ( 'bitter, stagnant') appears to be Ti<po<; (standing
A
water, pond, marsh). The refs. to 'its changed state', 'its later state' ( too) seem to ref.
to water that is sweet by innate process becoming soured, and water that is by nature
bitter (stale) becoming sweetened. Here we have Greek metaphysics of the Roman
period acceptable to the Sam., who would find Ex. xv. 25 a proof of the validity of the
3 8 1 0 4 1
theory. 1. nmpW^T- I.e. the variable wind. Play on the Heb. TIJJ (Rock)
4 2
and the Aram, rmx (Form). MSS confused; D (jll) = nri'Smp o^K, L nmpa^M
A A
nrrs, but L = D, D .
142 Book I V G o d , M a n and S i n IV. §§.2,3
43
the d a y s of his f a s t i n g . T h u s H e inserted Y . between the t w o and
magnified the proclamation of it w i t h the w o r d P O ' O L O ( H I S W O R K )
44
(Deut. x x x i i . 4 ) , w h i c h he m a d e a seal for the w o r d s of p r a i s e .
A t the beginning H e mentioned Creation a n d also a t the end H e
magnified m a n ' s F O R M . H e blessed the whole w i t h the t w o words
T A M I M P O ' O L O (His w o r k is perfect).
Greatness belongs to our L o r d . H e has m a d e k n o w n in H i s wisdom
t h a t w h i c h H e m a d e manifest, for our L o r d in H i s great power m a d e
e v e r y t h i n g a form, then created a n d fashioned a n d m a d e creatures
exceedingly grand. E v e r y t h i n g w a s m a d e b y H i m . E v e r y t h i n g is from
H i m . E v e r y t h i n g w a s d r a w n into being b y H i s c o m m a n d " C o m e " ; it
w a s governed b y H i s power, m a d e strong b y H i s good (favour) and
magnified b y H i s glory.
E x a l t e d , good is he w h o d r a w s near to H i m a n d does not go far from
H i m , for H e is near to all w h o seek H i m a n d cares for all w h o love
H i m — a strong shield to those w h o believe in H i m , for H e is merciful
a n d pitiful.
S o H e testified of Himself, "The Lord, a God merciful and gracious"
( E x . x x x i v . 6).
§ 3. G O D ' S J U S T D E A L I N G S
1 3 4 4 4 5
I.e. 40. I.e. he topped verse 3 with verse 4. I.e. KI as previously-
4 8 4 7
explained. Lit. the 'living ones'. Root JXD = Jew. Targ. jso (Ithpe.).
IV. § . 3 G o d ' s J u s t Dealings 143
§ 4. T H E U N C H A N G I N G G O D
5 8
A GOD OF F A I T H F U L N E S S (Deut. x x x i i . 4)
5 8
This tradition not recorded in the Asatir. The personal name Eden occurs frequently
of High Priests in the chronicle Tolidah (Ed. Neubauer, Journal Asiatique [1869]). The
first so named is Eden ben Tsadiq ben Shuthelah, one of the earliest High Priests after
Uzzi ben Bahqi ben Shishi ben Abisha (the biblical one). See Neubauer, op. cit., p. 433.
6 7 6 8
I.e. Deut. xxxii. 3a. The interpretation of EMUNAH is based on the Sam.
5 9
(Aram.) use of the root p x to connote stability and constancy. Num. xii. 13.
8 0 A A
This sentence translated according to (for 1 3 1 . na ). The allusions are uncertain
and there is no Miriam tradition in the Asatir. According to our text Moses made a
request to Miriam; she attended to it (nay nap) and got for him what he had re
8 1 A
quested. jjj.
146 Book I V G o d , M a n and S i n IV. §.4
4 2 8 8 8 4
I.e. for wabx. I.e. for non. For the name of this letter (Jew. WAW/VAV)
8 5
v. Petermann, op. ext., p. I. It represents the number 6. I.e. the last letter of pne>.
8 8 8 7
H E (Petermann, op. cit. Y [J]) = 5. ALAF = 1 and representing DVIVK.
8 8
Moses and Aaron. For the significance of this union, see C. Vols. I and II for
Services of Zimmut, and Introduction, chapter 7, of D. W. Mowbray, A critical Edition
and Translation of the Sam. Liturgies for the Zimmut Pesah and Zimmut Sukkot and
Associated Semi-Festival Liturgies (Ph. D. dissertation, University of Leeds, 1959).
8 9 7 0 7 1 A
I.e. of a i r . Root jax. Lit. 'word'; 1. rin^a (so ) for MSS vftn.
IV. §. 4 The Unchanging God 147
w i t h them. T h e great prophet Moses did not summon the wise except
for the purpose t h a t t h e y should teach the congregation. Moses sat to
86
t e a c h the people. H e t a u g h t the wise m e n a n d t h e y in turn t a u g h t
(the people).
1
Consider I will put a division*" '; t h e y are the w i s e w h o received a
portion of the truth a n d it w a s m a d e efficacious for them. W h a t is to
be done w i t h those w h o h a v e no portion ? T h e y are removed a n d are
in privation.
W h e n the great prophet c a m e to strike the rock to bring forth w a t e r
from it, his L o r d said to him, "Taking with you some of the elders of
Israel" ( E x . x v i i . 5; T a r g . ) . Blessed is our L o r d w h o magnifies H i s
beloved and cares for them in all their a c t i v i t y . I t behoves us to w a l k
in the w a y s of life a n d not depart from the T r u e One, b u t to observe
8 8
the command of Moses, H i s M a n .
And upright (Deut. x x x i i . 4) H e further strengthens w i t h the w o r d
H I P ( H E ) . B y this m y s t e r y H e revealed t h a t H e is the A n c i e n t One
w h o has no beginning. H e is the One w h o existed a b o v e the a b y s s of
the P r i m a e v a l Silence. H e it is w h o created when H e willed a n d intend
8 9
ed. H e is I A M . H e is the One w h o is after the w o r l d ; just as H e w a s
in the first, so will H e be in the last.
L e t us b o w down before H i m and s a y w i t h reverence a n d great
faith, "There is only one G o d . "
§ 5. T H E S I N F U L N E S S O F M A N
See h o w the great prophet stood a n d began reproving the w o r l d ,
while Israel listened. H e did not reprove until after the utterance w a s
acceptable to G o d . T h e good are magnified b y it. H e included the
90 91
f o r c e s of heaven a n d earth a n d placed them f i r s t , just as G o d d i d ;
the preparation which is for life magnifies w h a t it is. I t is prepared
from the beginning to help the m i n d of m a n . T h u s G o d said, "Life and
death" (Deut. x x x . 1 9 ; T a r g . ) — o n e prepared for A d a m a n d one prepar
ed for Moses. A d a m tasted death prepared; Moses fasted for life
prepared.
9 2
They have dealt corruptly (Deut. x x x i i . 5 ) — A d a m a n d E v e , through
the w o r d of the serpent which c a m e treacherously a n d spoke lies:
9 3
"And you will be like the angels" (Gen. iii. 5; T a r g . ) . I t is the phrase
dealt corruptly t h a t makes known t h a t it w a s not the w o r d of truth.
94
T h u s H e wisely said, "They are not his" (Deut. x x x i i . 5 ) as great
reproof. Dealt corruptly includes the utterance of the serpent w h i c h
8 8 8 7
For root rn in this sense v. C. p. 20 line 3. Ref. to the division between Israel
8 8 A 8 9 A
and Egypt in Ex. viii. 23 (cf. Vulgate). 'His apostle'. 'the unceasing'.
8 0 A 9 1 9 2
But 'the people'. I.e. in the first verse of the great Song (Deut. xxxii.). So
9 8 A 9 4
S.P., L X X . TV-DS^a (so ) for M.T. a^W. So S.P., L X X .
i5» Book I V God, Man and Sin IV- §.5
T H E T E N P R O P H E C I E S w i t h w h i c h he prophesied a n d b y w h i c h
the T r u e One strengthened t h e m — t h e first of them w a s in his s a y i n g
Remember the days of old (Deut. x x x i i . 7 ) . As I live for e v e r (Deut. x x x i i .
1 0 0
40) , The Lord will reign for ever and ever ( E x . x v . 1 8 ) , There was no
foreign god with him (Deut. x x x i i . 1 2 ) , Then he forsook God who made
him (Deut. x x x i i . 1 5 ) . As the gentle rain upon the tender grass (Deut.
x x x i i . 2 ) , the s a y i n g / am the Lord ( E x . x x . 2 , et passim), and that
101
which is a s e a l to i t — A n d scoffed at the rock of his salvation (Deut.
x x x i i . 1 5 ) . They have made for themselves a molten calf... and said These
1 0 2
are your gods, 0 Israel ( E x . x x x i i . 8 ) , They stirred him to jealousy
1 0 3
with strange gods (Deut. x x x i i . 16) , referring to their assembly before
B a a l P e o r ; there w e r e begotten there children of adultery. With
10
abominable practices they provoked him to anger (ibid.) *—i.e. Zimri's
immorality ( N u m . x x v . 1 4 ) , Z i m r i w h o imagined he could create a
garden for immorality. They sacrificed to demons which were no gods
1 0 6
(Deut. x x x i i . 1 7 ) — e v i l for t h e m ! T h e y b o w e d d o w n to t h e m a n d
sacrificed to them w i t h m u c h wickedness. To gods they had never known
(ibid.). When you beget children (Deut. iv. 2 5 ) , The Lord saw it and
1 0 6
spurned (Deut. x x x i i . 1 9 ) — t h i s contains an end! And it burns to the
1 0 7
depths ofSheol (Deut. x x x i i . 2 2 ) . W o e to the e r r a n t ! T h e deed of the
people of S o d o m is here mentioned again. And there is none that can
deliver out of my hand (Deut. x x x i i . 3 9 ) . H e destroys the worshippers
of an alien god and t h e y h a v e no deliverance from brimstone a n d fire.
1 0 8
And makes expiation for the land of his people (Deut. x x x i i . 4 3 ) .
Blessed are the good, for H e has m a d e k n o w n in the w o r l d w h a t is
hidden for them.
§.6 § 6. R E P E N T A N C E A N D F O R G I V E N E S S
1 2 3
For (a fire) is kindled ...to Sheol (Deut. x x x i i . 2 2 ) . H e adds force
to it w i t h the w o r d 'beneath'. H e revealed the greatness of the D a y of
V e n g e a n c e a n d the great judgement t h a t will be w r o u g h t then. W e are
unable to comprehend h o w it will be. I t is good for those w h o are to be
delivered then. B y well-doing t h e y h a v e prepared for it. There will be
no fire for them. T h e y h a v e succeeded in s a v i n g themselves b y their
actions; from evil desires t h e y h a v e kept a w a y . T h e y h a v e not been
i n v o l v e d in lies or false speaking. Therefore their L o r d has honoured them.
W o e to those w h o are not so in this w o r l d ! T h e y are troubled a n d in
the D a y of V e n g e a n c e punished. G o d is too righteous for them in H i s
1 1 8 A
IBO'a ("D Ira) is translated in by various terms,'here book', but often 'place of
1 1 9 1 2 0
instruction' or 'synagogue' is meant. Lit. 'is'. The chief activity in the iso rra.
1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 8
Lit. 'cleaves to'. "jap for *>op. As S.P., with var. *?WIB; cf. also n. 107.
IV. §.( R e p e n t a n c e a n d Forgiveness 155
1 2 4 1 2 8
Aph. root "J^T. Living ones, common fig. for 'angels', but cf. the next usage
1 2 6 1 2 7
of the word. Or 'dismayed'. Not 'angels' in view of the contrast here;
1 2 8 A
cf. n. 125. Dubious; 1^1) seems to have no connection with ian other than a
phonetic one. The tradition, however, of attendant angels at the giving of the Tablets
1 2 9
is a Sam. one (Liturgy, passim). I.e. the calf making.
156 Book I V God, Man and Sin IV. §.6
1 3 5 1 8 6
I.e. as S.P., L X X , Syr. Or nrma originally nmiaa ? The latter seems more
1 3 7 1 3 8
natural to the context. As S.P., with var. aTS' and o'Vnxn. For this
meaning, cf. Bibl. Heb. Niph., root ns*l.
158 Book I V God, Man and Sin IV. §.7
§ 7. P R A I S E T O T H E C R E A T O R
1 3 9 1 4 0
But S.P. 03 linn "7K1 Disn VK, this representing Moses' covenant. As S.P.
1 4 1 1 4 2
but Aram, p n s for Heb. tjpon. As S.P., but sing. A ' a s lively'; according
W
11
to the exegesis here. B i n does not mean 'kicked' (as A.V., R.S.V. etc.), but 'was
1 4 3 A
prosperous', a more suitable rendering. So ; cf. Gen. Rabba s. 98 for ••'yn "B in
a similar sense.
IV. § . 7 Praise to the Creator 159
§ 8. T H E C O M P A S S I O N O F G O D §.8
1 6 1
The Lord saw it, and spurned (Deut. x x x i i . 1 9 ) . H e appeared w i t h
manifold wonders and spurned w i t h judgements. H e appeared w i t h
wonders in order to m a g n i f y y o u a n d spurned w i t h judgements in order
162
to strengthen y o u , because of the provocation of his sons (ibid.) —a
w o r d of reproof. A l l the congregation submitted before this statement.
H e included the daughters too w i t h the sons (ibid.). T h e y w e r e all
included in this statement—children in whom is no faithfulness (Deut.
x x x i i . 2 0 ) , severe condemnation. W o e to a m a n w h o is not a w a k e n e d
(by it).
They have stirred me to jealousy with what is no god (Deut. x x x i i . 2 1 )
through evil desire. W o e to them for w h a t t h e y h a v e done. They have
provoked me with their idols (ibid.) ten times and t h e y did not stop doing
1 6 3
so. I said, " I will be wrathful w i t h t h e m " b u t I reverted to m y
promise through the p r a y e r of Moses and h a d p i t y for them. I will
obliterate from men their m e m o r y t r u l y . T h e covenant w i t h their fa
1 6 4
thers I held o v e r for them.
See h o w merciful and pitiful is this great K i n g w h o does not reject
the deed of those w h o deal w i t h H i m .
Moses himself w a s submissive and he reproved the congregation of
Israel, so that t h e y should learn the truth and these w o r d s be in their
heart, and t h a t t h e y should hold fast to them a n d know them in your
heart that, as a man disciplines his son, the Lord your God disciplines you
(Deut. viii. 5; T a r g . ) . W h a t great compassion y o u r L o r d shows to y o u !
Y o u too should show compassion to yourself a n d w a l k after the t r u t h
and keep it, that it m a y keep y o u . H e a l all w h o are sick—the S c r i p t u r e
of the great prophet Moses will heal w i t h medicine prepared b y the
165
T r u e One. Deliverance is m a d e s m o o t h for those w h o are led w i t h
1 6 6
him, for it is borne in a wholly beneficial w a y . A good guide does not
go a s t r a y in the w a y of those w h o please G o d .
Merciful and pitiful is this great K i n g w h o magnified H i s prophet
and increased him in everything.
Merciful and pitiful is this great K i n g w h o honoured H i s prophet
and entrusted him w i t h H i s property.
E x a l t e d is the great prophet Moses, the faithful one w h o w a s in the
light of the T r u e One! H e began to reprove all Israel, s a y i n g first of all,
161
"Ask your father, and he will show you" (Deut. x x x i i . 7; T a r g . ) w h a t
H e has done for y o u r sake, for the T r u e One said, "Israel is my first
168
born son" ( E x . iv. 2 2 ) . H e perfected them w i t h m i g h t a n d m a d e
t h e m strong in all t h a t is good.
Praise the great K i n g w h o called Israel My firstborn son, t h a t H e
might g i v e them all glory, as did A b r a h a m . S o G o d appointed a n d
1 , 1 1 8 2 1 8 8 A
As S.P., with var. y ni\ et seq. As S.P., with var. 0TO3H. 'I will discard
1 8 4 A 1 8 5 1 8 8 A
tbem'. So ; or 'made easy for them'. From Latin 'regulare' ? So for
1 6 7 1 , 8 A
cf. Jew. Targ. xbww ? For iim. 'my special people'.
164 Book I V God, Man and Sin IV. §.8
169 A 1 , 0
et seq. MSS ja ( u), as Syr. ^o, (uo, infrequently for na. MSS "?» "sn:
1 A
probably 1. "[ib ? "si ( 'in your heart').
IV. §.8 T h e Compassion of G o d 165
evildoing (as y o u see in) Take off the rings of gold which are in the ears
of your wives ( E x . x x x i i . 2 ) . T h e daughter w h o w a s unmarried w a s not
included anong them. T h u s H e said, "Sons and- daughters" (Deut.
x x x i i . 1 9 ) meaning the women and the men w h o were involved in the
evildoing.
T h a n k s b e to the E t e r n a l One, w h o is everlasting w i t h all genera
tions a n d their successions. L e t us g i v e thanks to H i m for H i s abundant
goodness a n d favour, w h o sent a righteous prophet to reveal all glory
to us.
Children in whom is no faithfulness (Deut. x x x i i . 2 0 ) — Z i m r i the
adulterer, head of a father's house ( N u m . x x v . 1 4 ) , w a s an evil chief
1 7 1
from a permitted t r i b e .
Consider w h a t w a s said b y J a c o b concerning it, in connection w i t h
1 7 2
For in their anger they slay (Gen. x l i x . 6; T a r g . ) a k i n g . Therefore the
T r u e One further spoke prophetically, " H e w h o steals his father's secret
173
has no security and has no consideration for his b r o t h e r . " W h a t will
become of him ? H e w h o thinks in his mind t h a t he will break the fence
of the T r u e One, w h a t will his future be ? If it h a d not been for God's
p i t y , on account of J o s e p h ' s p u r i t y , w h a t w o u l d h a v e happened to
h i m ? A n d to his father, for Simeon w a s like C a i n ? Therefore it w a s
said, "Children in whom is no faithfulness" (Deut. x x x i i . 2 0 ) . H e reprov
ed them all for the shameful doings of Simeon, a n d of R e u b e n too.
W h a t w a s it R e u b e n did to his father ? H e stole a w a y his righteousness
a n d polluted his bed. Therefore H e said, "Children in whom is no faith
fulness" (ibid.), for there are t w o coupled together in the admonish
ment. Righteousness belongs to the J u d g e w h o shows no partiality and
w h o does not overlook a n action, whether b y praising its good or
condemning its evil. T h e good are exalted a n d the evil debased. There
has never arisen a n y o n e like Moses, w h o has t a u g h t us the w a y of the
T r u e One.
They have provoked me (Deut. x x x i i . 2 1 ) — a n evil offence. God's
statement (here) is a testimony to evil. They have put me to the proof
ten times ( N u m . x i v . 2 2 ; T a r g . ) ; How long ... refuse? ( E x . x v i . 2 8 ;
T a r g . ) ; How long ... despise me ? ( N u m . x i v . 1 1 ; T a r g . ) ; How long shall
this wicked congregation ... ? ( N u m . x i v . 2 7 ; T a r g . ) .
174
T h r e e (questions) h a v i n g the v a l u e of t h r e e h a v e been posed and
each one of them is as significant as the other! How long ... refuse?—
reference to those leaving E g y p t . Ishmael w a s teaching them then
hardness of heart.
1 7 1 A
I.e. The Simeonites, the smallest tribe (Num. xxvi. 14). 'discarded tribe'—after
1 7 2
Num. xxv. 17 ? If included in the quotation, -fin replaces Targ. nai (so M.T.).
1 7 3
Ref. to Reuben (Gen. xlix. 4). Not a quotation; raja (rare in such a usage) seems
to make it clear that it is not an exact quotation, which would be introduced by the
1 7 4
formula nam T,n. I.e. do not refer to one situation only.
IV. §§.8,9 God's Dealings w i t h the E v i l and the G o o d 167
How long will this people despise me?—i.e. the children w h o followed
and learned from E s a u .
How long shall this wicked congregation ...?—a p r o v o c a t i v e gathering.
T h e y come in a t Let us choose a captain, and go back to Egypt ( N u m . x i v .
§ 9. G O D ' S D E A L I N G S W I T H T H E E V I L & T H E G O O D
L e t us give ear a n d listen to w h a t H e said: " / will make the remem
brance of them cease from among men" (Deut. x x x i i . 2 6 ; T a r g . ) . A s for
those w h o m a d e m y statutes into nothing, I will m a k e r e m e m b r a n c e
of them to cease. A s for those to w h o m I imparted m y knowledge a n d
they did not w a n t to learn, I shall a p p e a r in m y judgement a n d m a k e
remembrance of t h e m to cease. A s for those unto w h o m I called a n d
they did not hearken to m y summons, I shall a p p e a r in m y j u d g e m e n t
1 , 5 1 7 6
Part S.P., part Targ. I.e. Ex. xiv. 1 3 - 1 4 divided into three parts, as though
1 7 7
consisting of three replies to three different groups of people. et seq. So ]p1B in
1 7 8
C. p. 510 (top). The He Locale in na'nsn does not appear in the Targ. form this
1 7 0
time. The statements of the 2nd and 3rd divisions seem to be derived from E x .
1 8 0 A 1 8 1 A
i. 10. 'uproot'. 1. yim 'are set'.
i68 Book I V G o d , M a n a n d Sin IV. §.9
1 9 0
in the footsteps of Moses the faithful prophet will not go a s t r a y , nor
1 9 1
b e g u i l t y of sin, b u t will serve in both w o r l d s .
T h e s e are the ten signposts w h i c h the great prophet Moses pointed
out to Israel, in order to encourage t h e m in the desert land when t h e y
h a d n o guide, for t h e y w o u l d w a n d e r (after his death). H e who jour
n e y s a n d keeps close to G o d cannot h a v e an enemy prevailing over
him—lest the wild beasts grow too numerous for you (Deut. vii. 2 2 ; T a r g . ) ;
if y o u are good, t h e y will all s u b m i t before y o u !
S o H e dealt w i t h A d a m w h e n H e set him a t the g a t e of the G a r d e n
a n d brought them to him to see what he would call them (Gen. ii. 1 9 ;
T a r g . ) . W h e n there w a s no rebellion there, t h e y all submitted to him.
W h e n it w a s said to Cain, "You shall be a fugitive and a wanderer on the
earth" ( G e n . iv. 1 2 ; T a r g . ) , he w a s afraid of the w i l d beasts and said,
"Whoeverfinds me will slay me" (Gen. iv. 1 4 ) . T h i s corresponded to the
evil deed! H e w h o does evil is recompensed in the judgement.
W h e n Israel w e r e obedient to their L o r d , it w a s said in connection
w i t h them, "So Israel dwelt in safety" (Deut. x x x i i i . 2 8 ) , their heart
full of j o y . T h i s is a significant statement. Praised b e the S a y e r of it
a n d glory be to the great prophet w h o repeated it!
He kept him as the apple of his eye (Deut. x x x i i . 1 0 ) — t h e eyes of the
L o r d y o u r G o d are on them from the beginning of the y e a r to the end
of the y e a r . Y o u r eyes h a v e seen e v e r y great w o r k of the L o r d which
H e has done.
192
S o H e dealt w i t h J o s h u a when H e said, "Your eyes have seen all
that the Lord did" (Deut. iv. 3; T a r g . ) to the t w o kings; and so to B a a l
P e o r — H e afflicted the worshippers of it a n d all w h o followed them H e
uprooted; H e placed y o u a b o v e all nations a n d H e keeps y o u as H e
keeps the apple of H i s eye. You shall lie down, and none shall make you
afraid ( L e v . x x v i . 6; T a r g . ) . T h i s is a Merciful G o d and there is none
besides H i m . T h i s is a righteous prophet like w h o m there has none
arisen or will rise from the descendants of A d a m .
1 9 3
Like an eagle that stirs up its nest (Deut. x x x i i . 1 1 ) . You shall lie
down, and none shall make you afraid ( L e v . x x v i . 6). H e w h o lies down
a n d is praiseworthy shall h a v e no evil thing in control of him.
Behold, w h e n J a c o b c a m e fleeing from his brother, righteousness
said to him, " T r u s t in y o u r L o r d and do not fear." Behold his sleep
a n d behold w h a t he d i d — a sleep in a holy place in which angels ever
dwelt, a place of escape for those w h o flee to it. L e t him enter safely
a n d dwell happily. D o not enquire of t h a t sleep, for its fruits are And
19i
let them make me a sanctuary that I may dwell in your midst ( E x . x x v .
1 8 0 1 9 1 A
A close parallel to John viii. 12. 'here and there', run does not mean 'here' in
Sam., nor is no normal in an Aram, passage. Possibly a mystical idiom reflecting a
1 9 2 1 9 3 1 9 4
divine name. As Syr., Vulgate. As S.P., with var. T>»\ I.e. as S.P.,
L X X , for M.T. 'their'.
IV. § . 9 God's Dealings w i t h the E v i l a n d the G o o d 171
not harden your heart (Deut. x v . 7; T a r g . ) ; Then your heart be lifted up,
210 2 1 1
and you forget the Lord your God (Deut. viii. 1 4 ) . O people of this
generation, a w a k e n yourselves from this long sleep a n d turn b a c k to
the T r u e One, for y o u are the children of the perfect ones. A l l good has
been given to y o u b y reason of y o u r ancestors.
O T h o u whose mercies are ever supporting, enable us to love T h e e
and keep T h y commandments, a n d do w h a t T h o u hast c o m m a n d e d
us. T h o u art to b e praised in deed, for T h o u a r t the Creator of all and
art to be found in T h y goodness. W e believe in T h e e a n d in Moses T h y
M a n and in T h y Scripture, which T h o u didst send d o w n through him
212
from T h y holy place in h e a v e n .
W h e n the great prophet Moses h a d finished mentioning the honey
a n d the oil, he said, "Curds from the herd, and milk from the flock"
(Deut. x x x i i . 1 4 ) . T h e dish which A b r a h a m set out in the plain of
Mamre w a s a hidden treasure for his sons. Of his o w n accord I s a a c
bestowed the like of that. J a c o b honoured t h a t action of his father a n d
offered offerings to the G o d of his father I s a a c . H e c o m m a n d e d this
on his descendants on Mount Gerizim—There you shall offer the Pass
over sacrifice (Deut. x v i . 2 ; T a r g . ) , the offering for the deliverance,
from your flock and your herd (ibid.), as the L o r d y o u r G o d blessed
y o u , v o t i v e offering a n d gratuitous gift.
L e t us all abide b y the truth as our L o r d has commanded, a n d let
us give praise a n d sing, bearing testimony a n d s a y i n g , " T h e r e is only
one G o d . "
T h a n k s be to the Merciful G o d w h o revealed to us light from H i s
great knowledge. L e t us humble ourselves a n d submit before our Maker.
L e t us hear the words of admonishment w h i c h Moses included w i t h
prophetic insight in this great S o n g — t e n expressions he uttered before
the congregation with great might.
§ 10. R E W A R D S F O R O B E D I E N C E TO T H E L A W
For a fire is kindled by my anger (Deut. x x x i i . 2 2 ) . S o d o m a n d G o m o r
rah were evil, unclean places—the priest defiled, b u t the fire purified
him! T h u s H e said, "Consecrate yourselves" ( N u m . x i . 1 8 ) . H e w a r n e d
of the fire devouring the land a n d its crops—unsown and growing
2 1 3
nothing (Deut. x x i x . 2 3 ) . T h e land would be destroyed a n d all its
inhabitants in their evildoing. T h e foundations of the mountains w o u l d
be swept a w a y . T h e n the sanctity of Mount Gerizim w o u l d be m a d e
known. H e said also, "And I will heap evils upon them" (Deut. x x x i i .
23) in the world. T h e y will be burnt a n d in the D a y of V e n g e a n c e t h e y
2 1 0 2 1 1 2 1 2
1. 'BJm. Part S.P., part Targ. This last statement contains the first three
2 1 8
tenets of the Sam. creed. As S.P., with var. vim & nnxn.
174 Book I V G o d , M a n and Sin IV. §.io
21i
will b e j u s t l y recompensed. I will spend my arrows upon them (ibid.).
P a y attention, O world, to behold w h a t will happen to them b y w a y of
recompense for the evils they h a v e done. They shall be wasted with
hunger (Deut. x x x i i . 2 4 ) ; And you shall eat, and not be satisfied ( L e v .
x x v i . 2 6 ; T a r g . ) — t h a t is their r e w a r d !
Devoured with burning heat and poisonous pestilence (Deut. x x x i i . 2 4 ) .
A false prophet is poison a n d a defiled apostate w o r m w o o d ! (cf. D e u t .
xxix. 18).
And I will send the teeth of beasts against them (Deut. x x x i i . 24) and
the earth will swallow them up. W o e to them in this!
With venom of crawling things of the dust (ibid.), which will enter
into their houses a n d sting them.
In the open the sword shall bereave, and in the chambers shall be terror
(Deut. x x x i i . 2 5 ) . N o t even one shall b e left there.
L i s t e n to these w o r d s a n d be w a r n e d , perchance y o u m a y endure
in all glory a n d good. A s long as y o u keep them, G o d will keep y o u .
2 1 5
W h e n y o u exalt them H e will exalt y o u , as the son of B e n E d e n
said, " I f y o u exalt G o d , y o u r L o r d will reveal to y o u good and will
increase y o u r g l o r y . " K e e p H i s statutes, t h a t H e m a y keep y o u , for
H e chose y o u for t h a t purpose. D o not delay coming, else y o u will
be rejected and not find H i m w h o w o u l d take y o u b y the hand, and
2 1 6
w h e n y o u repent repentance will not a v a i l y o u . Y o u r G o d is merciful
a n d pitiful, near to all w h o seek H i m .
And now, Israel, what does the Lord your God require of you, but to fear
2 1 7
(Deut. x . 1 2 ) . I f y o u obey H i s commandments H e will hear y o u r
voice. If y o u p u t H i s w o r d s into effect, H e will put the blessings into
effect for y o u . If y o u fear H i m , all the peoples of the land will fear y o u .
If y o u m a g n i f y H i s commandments, y o u will be exalted. If y o u come
a n d submit before H i m , y o u r enemy will be debased. If y o u open H i s
Scripture a n d read therein, H e will open for y o u the treasures of good.
W h a t great g l o r y ! W h a t magnificent grandeur! W h a t great bless
i n g ! W h a t an eternal k i n g d o m ! W h a t lofty sovereignty! W h a t double
g l o r y ! W h a t a pleasing epoch! W h a t blessed treasure! W h a t a store
t h a t is not diminished! W h a t a dish containing holy honour spread
out on i t !
G o d crowned it w i t h blessings; w i t h it perfection is bound, in it the
priest dwells, for his is the glory. T h e angels w h o serve the H o l y One
dwell there. T h e b r e a d it contains—the most select of its holy eaters
is the great n a m e , the praise of the great prophet Moses. A d a m arrang
ed it, N o a h laid its foundations, A b r a h a m built it, I s a a c renewed it,
J a c o b dedicated it, J o s e p h the king established it.
2 2 1 6 2 1 7
" As S.P., with var. Aram. pa. V. n. 56, Book IV. « • 1. nxr ? Part S.P.,
part Targ.
IV.§.io R e w a r d s for Obedience to the L a w 175
2 1 8 2 1 8 A 2 2 0
Approximate Targ. text. So ; 1. na'n. R.S.V. following L X X 'sons of
2 2 1
God'. As S.P., with var. rrfriai.
176 Book I V God, M a n and Sin IV. §.10
8 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 1
As S.P., with var. t r o n p . As S.P., with •>D'?X om. As S.P., with var.
2 2 6 2 2 8 2 2 7
imaaiO". As S.P., with var. x'XV. As S.P., with var. H T B S K . =
2 2 8
Jeshurun. Ref. to the twelve tribes in the two worlds.
IV. §.io R e w a r d s for Obedience to the L a w 177
2 2 8 2 8 0 2
Cf. root DJ3 in Jew. Targ. R.S.V. 'his hand' after L X X . " A -lord', aaa This
world and the next, often thus described, Moses from the upper, Israel from the lower.
178 Book I V God, Man and Sin IV. | . j
2 8 8 2 8 4 2 8 5
As S.P., with var. Dmj>X. Part S.P., part Targ. As S.P., with var.
2 3 8 8 8 7 2 8 8
nriDii] & DS'aiK. Root elsewhere used of 'hasten'. = n"?Dp. As S.P.,
with var. -jn (M.T. ro'n); Von Gall -inn misprint.
IV. §.n Recompenses for Disobedience t o the L a w 179
the most tender and delicately bred woman among you, who would not
venture to set the sole of her foot (Deut. x x v i i i . 56). H e w h o w a l k s in
evil, the sole of his foot will stumble. W h a t the w a l k i n g in evil involves
is the transgression of the c o m m a n d m e n t s ; (e.g.) You shall not turn
aside to the right hand or to the left. You shall walk in all the way which
the Lord your God has commanded you ( D ; u t . v . 3 2 - 3 3 ; T a r g . ) .
W h a t is meant b y the right h a n d a n d the left ? T h e l a n d of C a n a a n
243
is the right h a n d and the land of E g y p t is the l e f t . T h e w a y of the
T r u e One is in the middle. H e w h o turns to the one or the other—his
foot shall stumble. H e w h o has evil steps, let him b e prepared to meet
judgements from the sole of his foot to his h e a d !
G l o r y b e to the great prophet Moses, w h o magnified m e n w h o
believed in G o d a n d accepted his prophethood as true.
§ 12. T H E D A Y OF V E N G E A N C E
2 4 3 2 4 4
I.e. Canaan is to the East, Egypt to the West. As S.P., with var. o-ratBNl & rraxi.
2 4 5 A 2 4 6 2 4 7
So ; or 'adjured'. As S.P., with var. - p i l T a T B . As S.P., with var. miTlS.
2 4 8
Not apparently an exact quotation.
182 Book I V God, Man and Sin IV. §.I2
2 4 9 2 5 0 2 5 1 A 2 5 2
Part S.P., part Targ. Lit. 'be spread out'. So , not as Bibl. Heb. Cf.
2 5 8 A
Rev. vii. n . So ; not as Bibl. Heb. root.
IV. §.12 T h e D a y of V e n g e a n c e 183
T h e one provides refreshing coolness for them, the other gives them
rest. W h a t a splendid portion, the portion of righteousness! H e w h o is
2 6 0
humble will b e in great glory in this w o r l d a n d the n e x t .
G l o r y b e to the great prophet Moses w h o m his L o r d sanctified a n d
placed in a status which no m a n of the descendants of A d a m has ever
attained, neither before him nor since.
T h e eighth statement is terrifying to all w h o hear: Where are their
gods? (Deut. x x x i i . 3 7 ) . T h i s refers to those w h o worship an image m a d e
b y h u m a n hands. H e w h o m a k e s an i m a g e a n d worships it, his F o r m
will b e changed in the D a y of J u d g e m e n t . H e w h o worships something
261
t h a t has been c r e a t e d a n d m a k e s it the object of his trust, when the
T r u e One appears w h o will there b e to s a v e him ? H e w h o makes much
of other than his Creator, w h e n he stands in the D a y of Vengeance
w h o will s a v e him ?
L e t us t u r n b a c k from the w a y of error a n d g o in the w a y of right
eousness—the w a y t h a t provides rest for all w h o tread it. H o w excell
ent is t h a t w a y ! I t behoves us to w a l k in it, for there H e calls, "Come
on, for I a m before y o u ; do not fear." (Cf. D e u t . x x x i . 8 ) . L e t us listen
to the w o r d s , for t h e y are from the mouth of the T r u e One. L e t us not
turn from them ever, perchance w e m a y remain in the glory H e has
given us.
2 6 2
T h e ninth statement: Let them be your protection (Deut. x x x i i . 3 8 )
in t h a t great d a y . T h e L o r d of the w o r l d will come among all the
peoples w h o worship the stars, sun, moon, fire, or a n y image, the
worshippers of B a a l - Z e p h o n , the m a k e r s of the Calf a n d the w o r
shippers of B a a l - P e o r . W h e n all these people come, t h e y will see them
t u m b l e ! T h e T r u e One w i l l s a y to them, "These are your gods" ( E x .
x x x i i . 4 , 8 ; T a r g . ) , b y following w h i c h y o u h a v e gone a s t r a y in y o u r
minds. L e t t h e m arise to help y o u a n d b e y o u r preservation! I a m the
one w h o w a s a shield to A b r a h a m in Sodom, when he said, "I have
sworn to the .. Most High Powerful One, ruler of heaven and earth (Gen.
x i v . 2 2 ; T a r g . ) . W h a t p o w e r h a v e y o u r gods t o d a y to a c t ? R e c e i v e
y o u r rewards n o w ! Suffer affliction w i t h w r a t h ! 0 fire, burn them,
for they have stirred me to jealousy with what is no god; they have provoked
2 6 3
me (Deut. x x x i i . 2 1 ) w i t h their shameful acts. M y dwelling they h a v e
defiled, m y holiness t h e y h a v e profaned. T h e i r faces h a v e manifested
evildoings; t h e y h a v e multiplied their presumptuous behaviour before
m e . T h e y h a v e inhabited the apple of (my) e y e ; m y House they h a v e
desolated; from the T r u e One t h e y h a v e turned a w a y ; m y will they
264
h a v e c o n c e a l e d . T h e y h a v e gone a w a y from m e ; t h e y h a v e kept w h a t
belongs to m y enemies. H o w c a n I recompense them w i t h good things
2 6 0 2 6 1 1 2 6 2
Cf. the 3rd Beatitude, Matt. v. 5. Orthographic error; 1. •>(K)ni3 ?. So S.P.,
2 , 8 2 6 4
L X X , Syr., Vulgate. As S.P., but pam for Heb. on, and var. »0S73l. Or 'de
stroyed'.
IV. §.12 T h e D a y of V e n g e a n c e 185
2 , 7 2 , 8
265 F o r „2j .
m 26« L i . 'goes', A 'continues'.
t So R.S.V. Part S.P., part Targ.
i86 Book I V God, Man and Sin IV. §.I2
2 8 9 2 7 0 A 2 7 1
D. 1 marg, add. rest of Deut. xxxiv. 10. 'who pierced the veils'. R.S.V.
2 7 2
'vindicate'. As S.P., with var. nns;.
IV. §.12 T h e D a y of V e n g e a n c e 187
souls h a v e relief within the kingdom. One will come in peace to bring
273
in r e l i e f .
And there is none remaining, bond or free (ibid.). T h e r e the w o r d of
the T r u e One will be enforced a n d H e will illumine the w o r l d w i t h
w h a t H e will bring about in it.
H o w momentous the hour w h e n G o d ' s voice is h e a r d going forth in
the world! A l l creatures will b e a r r a y e d w i t h their heads lowered, their
274
hearts quaking, their eyes f i x e d , their limbs shaking from fear on the
D a y of J u d g e m e n t . T h e mouth of the D i v i n e One speaks: "See now
274
that I, even I, am He" (Deut. x x x i i . 39). T h o s e w h o a c k n o w l e d g e and
275
k n o w will then be delivered. Behold, 1 have taught you statutes and
ordinances (Deut. iv. 5), only take heed (Deut. iv. 9).
J , even I am He, w h o lives a b o v e Creation a n d Mount Sinai.
I, even I, am He, w h o is a n d there is no other beside me.
I, even I, am He, w h o is without time or place.
I, even I, am He, to w h o m the life of the world belongs.
/, even I, am He, w h o raised a n d spread out b y m y power.
/, even I, am He, w h o planted the G a r d e n a n d uprooted S o d o m .
/, even I, am He, w h o uprooted a n d withheld.
/, even I, am He, to w h o m all belongs a n d to w h o m it will return.
/, even I, am He, w h o s l a y s all living a n d brings to life all dead. '
/, even I, am He, w h o recompenses m y a d v e r s a r y w i t h vengeance.
A n d now, it is good for us to rely on the T r u e One a n d fear H i s
might, perchance w e m a y reach the w a y of prosperity, a n d not cease
to praise our L o r d a l w a y s , t h a t w e m a y be exalted a n d increased in all
glory, and enter into a c i t y which is full of m e r c y a n d p i t y , in w h i c h
all the inhabitants are a t rest. T h i s is a Merciful G o d a n d there is none
besides H i m . T h i s is a true prophet w h o magnifies the good.
L e t us return now w i t h perfect m i n d to H i s s a y i n g , "For the Lord will
276
judge his people" (Deut. x x x i i . 36). E v e r y o n e k n o w s his recompense
here. See h o w those w h o k n o w m e are given life through m y goodness
and are in j o y through m y glory. See h o w it w a s said to P h a r a o h king of
E g y p t , "Let my people go", for I a p p e a r for the sake of delivering them.
For your people have acted corruptly (Deut. ix. 1 2 ) — a serious sin on the
D a y of V e n g e a n c e ! One will b e separated from the other. Therefore the
great prophet Moses said, "And have compassion on his servants" (Deut.
x x x i i . 36). T h e one w h o is apostate will receive retribution, b u t the one
w h o obeys will find rest. H a p p y t h e y w h o o b e y ! W o e to all g u i l t y ones!
2 7 8
The ref. to a kingdom and one coming as an inaugurator is unique to this passage.
There is no doctrine of a kingdom of God as understood in Christianity, but the Sam.
teaching is that God has a kingdom composed of His beloved—otherwise unspecified.
The one to come is the Taheb; his function of restoration involved relief for the
hard-pressed believers on earth. It is possible that the kingdom ref. to is earthly.
2 7 8
271 A. 275
S O . p . , L X X , Syr., Vulgate.
S o s R.S.V. 'vindicate'.
i88 Book I V G o d , M a n and S i n IV. §.I2
the first of the Righteous a n d Moses the highest of all prophets. / , even
I, am He, to the one a n d to the other; to A b r a h a m H e said, " / am God
almighty" ( E L S H A D D A I — G e n . x v i i . i ) , to Moses H e said, " / am
the Lord" ( Y H W H — E x . x x . 2 ) . A b r a h a m slew kings w h o h a t e d
the t r u t h ; he smashed their gods a n d w i p e d out their m e m o r y w i t h
great triumph. T h e great prophet Moses j u d g e d their gods a n d slew
the worshippers of them. T h u s H e said, "And there is no god beside me"
(Deut. x x x i i . 3 9 ) . H e a d d e d force to all this w i t h a momentous state
2 7 8
ment : "I kill and I make alive" (ibid.) ; 1 kill e v e r y sinner a n d all w h o
lie to m e a n d e v e r y false scripture of those w h o s a y t h a t it is from me,
when it is not so. I m a k e alive all good people a n d the scripture t h a t
t h e y possess, for it is from m e a n d will revert to me. M y n a m e a n d m y
commands a n d statutes, all m y judgements a n d l a w s are in it. I t w a s
heard from m y m i g h t y mouth and w a s written b y m y h a n d . A s I live,
so m y S c r i p t u r e will live.
As I live for ever (Deut. x x x i i . 4 0 ) , m y g l o r y a n d also m y Scripture.
As I live for ever is a strong o a t h — a s H e said, "But truly, as I live,
and as all the earth shall be filled with the glory of the Lord" ( N u m . x i v .
2 1 ) . J live for ever. A b r a h a m a n d Moses are the t w o origins. H e w h o
turns a w a y from A b r a h a m is an apostate a n d transgressor. H e w h o
turns a w a y from Moses is like the son of Shelomith ( L e v . x x i v . n ) .
T h e t w o of them are exalted, for t h e y extolled their fathers. E v e r y o n e
2 7 9 280
w h o is f r o m them returns to his o r i g i n . .
L e t us prostrate before our G o d a n d Creator, a n d believe in H i m
a n d in Moses the prophet w h o b r o u g h t life to u s — a s H e said, "For
that means life to you and length of days" (Deut. x x x . 2 0 ; T a r g . ) .
L e t us contemplate w i t h the inner e y e a n d see the great prophet
Moses s a y i n g to the congregation: And there is none that can deliver out
of my hand (Deut. x x x i i . 3 9 ) . Is the Lord's hand shortened? ( N u m . x i .
2 3 ) T h e Lord's h a n d began a n d it created. B y it H e returns e v e r y t h i n g
to its original state through H i s greatness. Therefore H e said, "Hand"
( Y A D ) and "will judge"™ ( Y A D I N ) (Deut. x x x i i . 3 6 ) .
If the defendant w a s innocent, w o e to the (lying) witness! I f he w a s
lying, the witness is shown to be honourable.
And there is none that can deliver out of my hand—this statement deals
w i t h witnesses, t h a t there m a y be no l y i n g witness seen in the world.
281
If the h a n d of a witness is stretched forth a n d he has k i l l e d an inno
cent man, then There is none to deliver out of my hand—he will not b e
delivered from m e ! If he killed a g u i l t y m a n , Moses (you m a y r e m e m
ber) preceded him b y killing the E g y p t i a n !
H e declared to the congregation, "Blessed is our G o d for e v e r ! " a n d
"Blessed is H i s n a m e for e v e r ! "
2 7 8 2 7 8 A 2 8 8 2 8 1
Part S.P., part Targ. So . I.e. God. I.e. caused his death by false
witness.
BOOK V
T H E D E A T H OF MOSES
A l s o b y M a r q a h , the F a v o u r of the L o r d be upon
h i m ! T e a c h i n g concerning So Moses the servant of
1
the Lord died there (Deut. x x x i v . 5 ) .
§ 2. T H E L A S T C O M M A N D S O F M O S E S §. 2
1 6 A 1 7
"Canaan. So 6_^*j>; i.e. my dwelling is pledged. V. n. 8 of text regarding
1 8 A
the Asatir account. MSS -yb, better; no doubt was corrupted from "73
1 9 A
by the proximity of ubm. So X'BS; Targ. Onk. Gen. xxiv. 65; 'tent'.
BookV T h e D e a t h of Moses V. §.2
§ 3. T H E A S C E N T A N D G L O R I F I C A T I O N O F M O S E S §
4 6
blessings of h e a v e n ; and he will give the rain for your land in its season
(Deut. x i . 1 4 ) ; h e a v e n g a v e ear to his w o r d s when he said, "Give ear,
0 heavens, and I will speak" (Deut. x x x i i . 1 ) .
47
E x a l t e d for e v e r this light w h i c h shone from A m r a m and J o c h e b e d .
T H E E A R T H glorified him seven times: he wrote a t the beginning of
Genesis The earth was without form and void (Gen. i. 2 ) ; earth trembled
because of him on the third d a y , as he w r o t e in the l a w And the whole
mountain quaked greatly ( E x . x i x . 1 8 ) ; he w r o t e of the natural state of
the e a r t h — A n d the land will yield its increase ( L e v . x x v i . 4 ; T a r g . ) ; it
swallowed u p his enemies as is written, And the earth opened its mouth
and swallowed them up, with their households ( N u m . x v i . 3 2 ) ; he w a s
exalted a b o v e all the descendants of A d a m a s he wrote, Now thejnan
Moses was very meek, more than all men that were on the face of the earth
( N u m . xii. 3 ) . E x a l t e d is this great prophet Moses to w h o m the L o r d
iS
of the w o r l d said, "Go up to (this) mountain of the Abarim" (Num.
x x v i i . 1 2 , D e u t . x x x i i . 4 9 ) ; a n d he ascended Mount N e b o and the Lord
showed him all the land (Deut. x x x i v . 1 ; T a r g . ) . T h i s w a s a great wonder,
none like i t !
W h e n earth s a w heaven listening to his w o r d s w i t h fear, it (too) w a s
afraid a n d listened to his w o r d s , as he said, "And let the earth hear the
words of my mouth" (Deut. x x x i i . 1 ; T a r g . ) . A l l this happened to the
great prophet Moses, like w h o m there has never been a n y m a n from
the sons of A d a m .
F I R E glorified him seven tines: fire's first dealing w i t h him w a s on
M o u n t S i n a i a t the beginning of his prophetic mission; it w a s revealed
to him in the B u s h ; from it call w a s m a d e b y n a m e twice—"Moses,
Moses" ( E x . iii. 4 ) — a great w o n d e r the like of which has never been
in the w o r l d a n d n e v e r will b e ! F r o m the fire he w a s called on the
morning of the d a y of H o r e b , from the t o p of Mount Sinai in the pre
sence of six hundred t h o u s a n d ; fire flaming u p to the heart of heaven,
as he said, "While the mountain burned with fire to the heart of heaven"
(Deut. iv. 1 1 ) ; then he trod in it w i t h his feet and w a s not h a r m e d b y
i t ; it w a s like a plant w i t h the d e w of heaven on it under his feet; in
the h o l y S a n c t u a r y , when a priest offered the offering for A a r o n a n d
his sons, fire w e n t forth from the L o r d a n d consumed all t h a t he h a d
p u t upon the a l t a r ( L e v . i x . 2 4 ) .
H e praised a n d worshipped the L o r d of all the world, the doer of all
wonders. E x a l t e d for ever b e this great prophet w h o quenched the
excesses of the fire; so also his p r a y e r quenched the fire, as he said,
"And Moses prayed to the Lord, and the fire abated" ( N u m . xi. 2 ) . F i r e
consumed his enemies, as he said, "And fire came forth from the Lord,
4 8 4 7
I.e. the Ten Commandments. In the Liturgy {passim) the coming of Moses
to earth is conceived in astrological vein. From the 'constellation' (^ijn) of Amram
4 8 A
and Jochebed the light of Moses shone prior to his incarnation. 'the Hebrews'.
V. §.3 T h e A s c e n t a n d Glorification of Moses 205
and consumed the two hundred and fifty men offering the incense" (Num.
4 9
xvi. 3 5 ) .
Commemorate well a l w a y s this great prophet for whose sake all this
60
w a s done a n d let no one ever h a v e enough of commemorating him I
T H E C L O U D glorified him seven times: the first of these seven w a s ,
wherever his feet w a l k e d the cloud preceded h i m ; w h e n he led Israel
out of E g y p t as he said, "And the Lord went before them by day in a
pillar of cloud" ( E x . xiii. 2 1 ) . S u c h w a s the status of the g r e a t prophet
Moses! W h o c a n mention even a little of his glories? T h e cloud shone
before him a n d there w a s manifested to him a m i g h t y wonder w i t h i n
it, for it w a s not the cloud's normal function to shine, b u t r a t h e r its
normal function w a s to be dark. T h r o u g h this great prophet Moses it
61
both illumined a n d d a r k e n e d ; so he said, "And there was the cloud, the
6 2
darkness, and it lit tip the night" ( E x . x i v . 2 0 ) . W h e n the M a n Moses
s a w this event in the sea, for it w a s illumining all the beloved a n d
darkening the enemies, he praised his L o r d , the doer of wonders a n d
miracles, saying, " W h o is like T h e e , O L o r d , a m o n g the g o d s ? " ( E x .
xv. n ; Targ.).
E x a l t e d for ever is this holy prophet, to w h o m the L o r d of d i v i n i t y
said, "Lo, I am coming to you in a thick cloud, that the people may hear
when I speak with you and may also believe you for ever" ( E x . x i x . 9).
G r e a t w a s the morning of M o u n t Sinai, the morning of the third d a y ,
in which exceedingly great tremblings were manifested—hosts a n d
powers a n d foundations a n d angels, thunderings a n d lightnings, lights
a n d fire blazing to the heart of heaven, the cloud of which w e h a v e
just spoken, b y reason of the g r e a t prophet Moses, the M a n of G o d . H e
dwelt on Mount Sinai a n d the L o r d called to Moses w i t h g r e a t m i g h t a n d
Moses went u p ; H e addressed him face to face. T h e r e the cloud glorified
him. W h e n his L o r d came to h i m in it, H e m a d e him to hear H i s voice
calling from the midst of the f i r e — " I a m the L o r d y o u r G o d " ( E x . x x . 2 ;
T a r g . ) . T h e cloud covered him a t the time w h e n he w a s told, "And
I will cover you with my hand until I have passed by" ( E x . x x x i i i . 2 2 ) .
T h e powers supported him, the forces comforted him. the G l o r y
came to meet h i m ; the great L o r d descended in the cloud a n d stood
w i t h him a n d proclaimed the T e n W o r d s ( E x . x x ) w i t h the m o u t h of
divinity. T h e L o r d ' s peace be upon Moses the M a n , w h o achieved a
63
high degree which no other m a n has possessed.
1 9 5 0
As S.P., with var. 'n'npa. Or 'mentioning him'. The practice of commemorating
Moses or simply mentioning his name often seems to have developed widely among
the Samaritans up to and after the great 14th century revival. In many 14th century
and later MSS every service is completed by 'the peace of the Lord be upon Moses'
and often with prayers expressed on his behalf in a way corresponding to the Islamic
Tasliyah. For ^Dpl.
6 1 6 2 a
As S.P., with var. t i t . 'and the cloud was illumining
6 3
and darkening the whole night'. Lit. 'sat' (upon the seat of his status).
206 Book V T h e D e a t h of Moses V. §.3
5 4
= \ ^»fY> (ductus), or as Jew. Targ. K'OTD (= XIBIDDX) from Latin strata (so
5 5 A 5 6 A 6 7
Uj~ j Uj^). 'it' (the hand). But 'Adam wept'. As with the first
5 8
Adam (Gen. ii. 21). K add. (v. n. 61 of text): 'there were four caves prepared
from the days of Creation, the Cave of Machpelah for the Righteous of the world, the
V. §§. ,4 3
Commemoration of the Righteous 207
§ 4. C O M M E M O R A T I O N O F T H E R I G H T E O U S
Commemorate well for ever the great prophet Moses w h o b y his
59
death wrought great s o r r o w s w h i c h cannot ever b e estimated. T h e
sun of divine F a v o u r has been hidden a w a y a n d has entered into the
C a v e . I t will not rise or appear again. T h e m o u t h of the C a v e has been
closed b y the D i v i n e One a n d it will not be opened or k n o w n until the
D a y of Vengeance, as H e said, "But no man knows the place of his
burial to this day" (Deut. x x x i v . 6).
T h e pillar of cloud w h i c h w e n t before him has been r e m o v e d a n d
will not be seen ever again. T h e pillar of fire w h i c h shone b y night a n d
d a y will not appear ever again.
T h e M a n n a w h i c h descended from heaven through him a t G o d ' s
command has been cut off a n d will no more descend after his passing.
T h e shining light w h i c h abode on his face is w i t h him in his t o m b .
I t will not abide ever again on another's face.
T h e prophethood w i t h w h i c h he w a s vested, of which he w a s w o r t h y ,
has been hidden a w a y a n d no m a n will ever again be vested w i t h it.
H i s names are ten, described as Son, Child, S e r v a n t , Good, P r o p h e t ,
Faithful, Righteous, Moses the M a n of G o d , K i n g , J u d g e , Priest,
60
Teacher, Supplicater, Deliverer, S a v i o u r , Choice O n e , A commander's
6 1
portion was reserved (Deut. x x x i i i . 2 1 ) .
T h e peace of the L o r d be upon him from us for e v e r !
62
T w o brothers were sanctified —Moses and A a r o n ! T h e one a proph
et, the other a priest; the one trod in the fire, the other consumed w h a t
w a s left over b y the fire. T h e one died on the G o o d l y Mount a n d w a s
buried on it, the other died on M o u n t N e b o .
L o o k further on these t w o holy ones, Moses a n d A a r o n . T h e great
prophet Moses—the wonders t h a t were w r o u g h t through him from
heaven were hail, locusts, darkness. T h e great priest A a r o n — t h e w o n d -
Cave of Mount Gerizim for the divine dwelling-place, the Cave of Mount Hor for the
priesthood and the Cave of Mount Nebo for the prophethood. So D, L at end of Book I I .
6 9 A 6 0 6 1 8 2
So . Apparently for s m (so D. 1 marg.). As S.P., with var. ppm. Or
'consecrated themselves'.
208 Book V T h e D e a t h of Moses V. §. 4
see the four quarters of the w o r l d . Nor his natural force abated, for he
6 7
w a s vested w i t h the F o r m which A d a m cast off in the G a r d e n of E d e n ;
a n d his face shone u p to the d a y of his death. H e d i d not alter his
68
pronunciation, for it h a d to pronounce the letters of the w o r d s of t h e
l a w and he h a d to teach the reading of it to all Israel.
And the people of Israel wept for him .. thirty days (Deut. x x x i v . 8;
T a r g . ) , a n d the weeping has never ceased in the world. T h e status of
J o s h u a the son of N u n , the disciple of the great prophet Moses, b e c a m e
high in the eyes of all the congregation of Israel. Joshua the son of Nun
was full of the spirit of wisdom, for Moses had laid his hand upon him
6 9
(Deut. x x x i v . g ) . T h u s he w a s exalted a n d his status m a d e high for
ever.
Moses the son of A m r a m — l e t no m a n ever be satisfied w i t h the
mentioning of him!
Moses the son of A m r a m w a s honoured b y G o d in his life a n d in his
death.
H e wrote the l a w a t the c o m m a n d of the L o r d a n d t a u g h t it to all
Israel a t the c o m m a n d of the L o r d , as H e said, "Put it in their mouths"
(Deut. x x x i . 1 9 ) , a n d he w r o t e a t the end of this l a w w h i c h he received
And there has not arisen a prophet since in Israel like Moses (Deut.
x x x i v . 1 0 ) , w h o has done wonders like those which Moses wrought in
the sight of all Israel (Deut. x x x i v . 1 2 ) .
Moses commanded for us a law (Deut. x x x i i i . 4) a t the beginning of
which is the n a m e of G o d (Gen. i. 1 ) , a t the end of w h i c h is the n a m e
of Moses (Deut. x x x i v . 1 2 ) . C o m m e m o r a t e well for ever the Righteous
of the world, the origins of righteousness, A b r a h a m , I s a a c a n d J a c o b ,
70
w h o lie in the C a v e of M a c h p e l a h .
Commemorate well for e v e r J o s e p h the righteous, The Fruitful
Bough (Gen. xlix. 2 2 ) , w h o lies in the Piece of Land (Gen. x x x i i i . 1 9 ) .
Commemorate well for e v e r him w h o lies on M o u n t N e b o , the right
eous, faithful Moses the son of A m r a m , the M a n of G o d a n d the faith
ful of the Divine One, w h o w a s v e s t e d w i t h shining light, the receiver
of the t w o tablets, the one entrusted w i t h the things unseen a n d seen,
Moses the prophet.
Commemorate well for ever the ministers of the holy S a n c t u a r y ,
A a r o n a n d E l e a z a r , I t h a m a r a n d Phinehas.
Commemorate well for ever J o s h u a a n d Caleb a n d the S e v e n t y
Elders.
Blessed is our G o d for ever a n d blessed is H i s n a m e for ever.
There is only one G o d .
8 7 A 6 8
'light' for its usual rendering 'face'. Lit. 'tongue'. See Book VI, § 3 for
8 8 7 0
more detail on this. Mixed Heb. and Aram. (Targ ?). K's add. (v. n. 72 of text)
'Every prayer in their name is accepted' reflects the thought of a later era, when the
influence of Christianity and Islam had made itself felt in a permanent way.
BOOK VI
MISCELLANEOUS TEACHING
A l s o b y M a r q a h , an E x p o s i t i o n dealing
w i t h the T w e n t y - T w o L e t t e r s w h i c h are
the radicals for H e b r e w speech.
§ i. T H E N A T U R E O F C R E A T I O N
9
m a k e investigation along w i t h t h e m of t h i s . Y o u need do no m o r e !
H a p p y are y o u if y o u comprehend this a n d realize the m i g h t of the
Creator w h o created this. T h e s e creations are magnificent a n d great.
I t is not possible even for a knowledgeable m a n to k n o w the m i g h t of
the Creator. These are m i g h t y creations—great is the Creator of t h e m —
a n d it is not possible for even a knowledgeable m a n to k n o w H i s g r e a t
ness. These are magnificent creations; t h e y teach t h a t their Creator is
great and m i g h t y . I t is not possible for m i n d to comprehend H i s power.
S u c h m i g h t y d i v i n i t y ! S u c h powerful dominion! S u c h eternal sover
eignty ! S u c h everlasting greatness! S u c h farflung p o w e r !
W h o is there can s t a n d before it or c a n c o m p a r e it ? W h o possesses
creations like H i m or wonders like H i s or such striking phenomena as
H i s ? H i s power is in the heavens a b o v e a n d in the earth beneath.
T h e r e is no place outside of H i s control; all places H e m a d e , fashioned,
perfected, set in order, m a d e r e a d y . H e supplied their needs.
W h a t is in the heavens is in the heart, just as w h a t is in the earth is
10
in the i m a g i n a t i o n . W h a t is in the four quarters is in the reason, j u s t
as w h a t is in a n y place is in e v e r y inner thought. W h o c a n estimate
1 1
w h a t H e is or k n o w h o w H e i s ? F r o m H i s creations is H e k n o w n ;
from w h a t H e has m a d e is H e comprehended.
L e t us be sincere before H i m a n d worship H i s magnificence a n d s a y ,
" T h e r e is only one G o d . "
§ 2. T H E U S E O F W I S D O M <
Since this important m a t t e r is n o w understood, keep steadfastly to
it. M a y H i s grace be ever upon y o u !
A d a m knew it a n d b y it w a s safe. I t s a v e d him from the opposite
of w h a t he did.
A b e l knew it a n d he did a pleasing deed. W o e to Cain for w h a t he
did in his soul!
E n o s h knew it and called on H i s name, a n d H e m a d e him a root
1 2
to the whole h u m a n r a c e .
E n o c h knew it and to it h a d recourse; he w a l k e d in obedience
before H i m a n d H e rewarded him.
N o a h k n e w it and to it w a s led; it delivered him from the F l o o d
in his ark.
A b r a h a m knew it and w a l k e d before H i m (obediently); thus he
became the first of the Righteous of the world.
9
A unique statement for a teacher of religion at such a time, that his pupils should
1 0 1 1
marry science and religion. A Neo-Platonic (and Platonic) thought. I.e. what
1 2
is His modus vivendi. Humanity viewed as a great tree on the earth which has
many roots; these are the men of merit from Adam through the Righteous Three
(Patriarchs) through Moses to the end of time.
2l6 Book V I Miscellaneous T e a c h i n g VI. §.5
13
I s a a c k n e w it a n d e a g e r l y reached out to i t ; he became the root
of all the sincere.
J a c o b k n e w it a n d h a d recourse to i t ; it preserved him in well-
being a n d crowned him w i t h honour.
J o s e p h k n e w it a n d fled to i t ; it s a v e d him from a n y evil deed.
Moses k n e w it a n d w a s where it p l a c e d h i m ; it brought him to his
s t a t u s — w h o l l y successful.
A a r o n k n e w it a n d b y it w a s m a d e g r e a t ; he became the spokes
m a n of the sea of forgiveness.
E l e a z a r k n e w it a n d to it held f a s t ; he inherited all t h a t w a s his
father's a n d occupied his position.
Phinehas k n e w it a n d hastened to i t ; it brought life to his descend
ants a n d the congregation as well.
J o s h u a k n e w it a n d sought it sincerely; he w a s given a portion
not g r a n t e d to others.
Caleb k n e w it a n d l i v e d b y i t ; his L o r d placed him in the place of
truth.
Observe those w h o k n e w it a n d w h o kept ciosely to it w i t h heart
a n d soul. H e set out a collection of p a n e g y r i c s on t h e m ; an everlasting
c o v e n a n t w a s m a d e w i t h t h e m ! L e t it not b e annulled! B y reason of w h a t
transpires according to our merit w e live throughout all generations.
A n d n o w observe the evildoing of men. T h e y k n e w it as well, b u t
t h e y w a n t e d something different from it.
T h e evil serpent spoke in its n a m e a n d got u p treacherously a n d
m a d e nakedness k n o w n ; it fell from its m i g h t a n d w a s blotted out a n d
w o r e the C u r s e — n o escape from it c a n ever b e !
Cain k n e w it a n d p u t on t r e a c h e r y ; he w a s placed under an extre
m e l y great curse.
E n o s h , his sons a n d all his family, k n e w it a n d despite t h a t they
p r o v o k e d it.
T h e People of the F l o o d c a m e in like m a n n e r ; the F l o o d came a n d
destroyed them in a flash. A l l w h o l i v e d on earth perished w i t h them.
Cush a n d N i m r o d also k n e w it a n d were zealous in w h a t t h e y did.
Similarly, w h e n the People of S o d o m deserted the knowledge of
it, t h e y all perished in a flash—a v e r y hideous destruction!
W h e n P h a r a o h a n d his host deserted the knowledge of it, see
w h a t h a p p e n e d to t h e m !
W h e n A m a l e k a n d his people deserted the knowledge of it, m e m o r y
of t h e m w a s obliterated from off the face of the earth.
W h e n the Calf-Makers forgot it, t h e y all perished in the c a t a
strophe a n d their guilt remains upon t h e m until the D a y of V e n g e
ance a n d Recompense.
1 8
Lit. 'his neck was stretched out to it'.
VI. §.5 T h e U s e of W i s d o m 217
1 1 A
So . The root -p-)0 is to be compared with anD (as in Jew. Targ. and Syr.) or
1 6 u
Arabic d*^, and so 'confused, confounded'. For n'jDp et seq. I.e. The Ten
Words (Ex. xx).
218 Book V I Miscellaneous T e a c h i n g VI. §.
1 7
If an attack on the Jewish prophets, it is the only clear instance in Marqah's writings.
1 8
As S.P., with var. "pnrvaTB.
VI. §.5 The U s e of W i s d o m 219
2 2 A 2 3 2 4 A
'light'. If = POTO'I, but ouui. Or = Hoph'al. So . Root uncertain,
possibly a denominative from Latin just-, or connected with [irjcrrcop (counsellor). Cf.
2 5
also the proper name in Gen. Rabba s. 50. = VO(JUX6i;.
220 Book V I Miscellaneous T e a c h i n g VI. §§.2,3
F a i t h said to him, " P e a c e be to y o u , O leader w h o led six hundred
thousand."
Righteousness said to him, " P e a c e b e to y o u , O son w h o grew u p
excellently in m y c a r e . "
J u s t as these d i d him honour, so the world b o w e d before him and
said, " E x a l t e d is this prophet whose L o r d magnified him and w h o w a s
w o r t h y of it."
See him enter into the fire to receive from the right h a n d of G o d the
tablets of the covenant, the autograph of the T r u e One. W h e n G o d
willed a n d g a v e H i s a u t o g r a p h to the great prophet Moses in the
t w o tablets of the covenant, after H e h a d m a d e Israel to hear H i s
voice a b o v e Mount Sinai, H e w r o t e them on both sides of the tablets,
the one then the other.
2 6
A f t e r this Moses w e n t b a c k a n d requested the w o r d s of m e r c y
w h i c h are a t t r i b u t i v e names. O u r L o r d appeared and wrote before h i m
these scriptures w h i c h H e w r o t e b y H i s greatness.
§.3 § 3. T H E W R I T I N G O F T H E W O R D O F G O D
8 1 8 2
For n^Spa. This verse is the nearest to Gnostic language the Samaritans
of the Roman period were capable of. The threefold expression here is in no
way conceived by the Samaritans as indicative of emanations from a Godhead.
8 8 3 4
Cf. John iv. IO. I A The unseen Garden of Eden is conceived of in two ways:
(i) as the future Paradise of blessed rewards; (2) as an earthly paradise where God's
3 5 A 3 6
people do His will and are at peace. So . For the thought of this passage cf.
John i. o—II.
VI. § . 3
T h e W r i t i n g of the W o r d of G o d 223
3 7 A 3 8 1 A 8 9 A 4 0
L 'hidden things'. Or for y a ? I. yb as . Or Form, 'face'. Cf. Rev.
4 1
i. 15. Cf. John iv. 14.
224 Book V I Miscellaneous T e a c h i n g VI. §.3
4 2 4 8 A 4 4
Cf. John viii. 12. MSS n u ; 1. runs as . I.e. of the Unseen and the Seen,
or of the two worlds.
VI. §§-3.4 T I T and Moses 225
§4. T I T A N D M O S E S 5
T I T said, " W h y is no mention m a d e of m e in the beginning of the
sections like m y companions, for m y name is not in the beginning of
4 8
Genesis ? A s a crown crowning all good w a s I not in front of A d a m a t
4 9
the time when he w a s choosing e v e r y choice thing ? W a s I not w i t h
the Righteous a n d did I not m a k e their hearts m y dwelling-place w i t h
greatness ? D i d I not hasten to J o s e p h and m a k e him great in the l a n d
of E g y p t ? W a s I not w i t h y o u to magnify y o u in e v e r y place G o d
placed y o u in, when I h a d no place in the proclamation of the w o r d s
4 5 4 6 A 4 7
I.e. the other letters of the Alphabet. add. 'if he made a slip'. The syntax
A 4 8
of this sentence is irregular. The translation is based on . I.e. in the first section
4 9 A
of the first qaz (Gen. i. i-ii. 3). 'when he was acquiring all good'.
226 Book V I Miscellaneous T e a c h i n g VI. §. 4
§ 5. N U N A N D M O S E S
6 2 6 3
I.e. fire, water, earth, wind, as discussed in Book II. The first letter of m.
8 1 6 5 A 6 6
I.e. the last letter of p n s . So better; 1. p ? I.e. in rP3J and m m .
VI. §§. ,6
5 S I M K A T a n d Moses 229
§ 6. S I M C A T A N D M O S E S
W h e n N U N h a d finished speaking w i t h Moses the prophet, S I M C A T
c a m e ; it stood before him and said, " O great prophet, w h y h a v e I no
portion a t the beginning of the first sections of the l a w ? I revealed to
Isaac m y n u m b e r w i t h might and I established from him descendants
to inherit his status. W i t h m y n a m e I clad him—deliverance to the
6 7 8 8 8 9
A 'images'. See the discussion in Book III, § 2. I.e. the beginning of rraa
7 0 7 1
and the end of prm. I.e. 50 cubits; so Ex. xxvii. 18. I.e. 100 cubits; so ibid.
7 2
As S.P., with var. rn»p.
230 Book V I Miscellaneous T e a c h i n g VI. §.6
7 8 7 4
+ 'to its former state' (pleonastic). Cf. Luke xii. 33, xviii. 22 (Mark x. 21; Matt,
7 6
vi. 20, xix. 21). Cf. Deut. xxviii. 12.
VI. §.6 S I M K A T a n d Moses 231
7 8 7 7 A A
Var. form of 'with mind ready' in the list above. 'prayer'; often misinterprets
7 8
lams (1.) as Bibl. Heb. root = regret: (2) = so here. I.e. the Day of Atone
7 9 A
ment. So ; thus = r m .
232 Book V I Miscellaneous T e a c h i n g VI. §.6
8 0
So ( t s A o a p o , baptism. The same root (sax) is used for the name as-Subba*
(Sabaeans), i.e. the Mandaeans, who were so-called because of their baptism rites
8 1 8 2
(nnsnaxn). V. n. 24 above. Lit. 'companion', here in sense of jnon.
VI. §§.6, 7 P H I a n d Moses 233
§ 7. P H I A N D M O S E S
See P H I speaking, a speech t h a t magnifies the listener, " O great
prophet Moses, w h o m G o d specially chose for apostleship, H e opened
before y o u the g a t e w a y to the unseen. I w a s w i t h y o u in seven places.
I did not leave y o u for a single moment, as (for example) when I arose
in Genesis, so as to go forth into the world in p e a c e ; I stood a n d opened
the gate of light and arranged within it seven other g a t e s !
The first gate, the one which permeated the darkness w i t h consider
able power, which he s a w and established.
The second gate, the gate of fire which w a s m a d e an element in all
things.
The third gate, b y which the sun developed, for energy w a s derived
from the fire.
The fourth gate, that which clad y o u r descendants in a state of glory,
wholly of comfort.
8 3 8 4 8 5
Cf. Jas. iv. 12. I.e. in the word so'l (Ex. xv. 22). I.e. in the word i s c i
8 8
(Ex. xvii. 1). I.e. in the word TODJ (Num. xi. 35).
234 Book V I Miscellaneous T e a c h i n g VI. §.7
The seventh occasion: I opened the gates of heaven for the acceptance
of y o u r petitions.
A l l these represent m y dealings w i t h y o u . I a m the w r i t i n g of H i s
hand and the sending of H i s speech. A f t e r our appearance to y o u , w e
came down onto y o u r h a n d and all our G o d c o m m a n d e d is in y o u r
hand alone. Our L o r d m a d e y o u to rely on us in truth and whereas w e
were His, H e entrusted y o u w i t h w h a t pertained to H i m , all t h a t is in
the world. I t w a s created w i t h five from us and it w a s completed b y it
too. In the beginning God created (Gen. i. 1 ) and God finished (Gen. ii. 2 ) .
W e are mere handwriting, not the Creator, for all t h a t is created is
begun and also finished. W e are not beginners or finishers; as w e w e r e
in the beginning, so will w e be in the end."
T h e n Moses answered these statements w i t h verification crowned
with wisdom, all of it light. " G r e a t is this b y which y o u were m a d e
unique! Y o u magnify m e and Creation. T h e light belongs to y o u ; the
earth and the w a t e r belong to y o u . T h e beginning of speech belongs to
y o u ; the treasures of the firmament belong to y o u . T h e speech of I s a a c ,
that of J o s e p h w i t h P h a r a o h belong to y o u . A l l t h a t has happened to
me has been through y o u . Y o u are a great witness to this. T h e good
tidings of glory to men belong to y o u ; the utterance of men is the
beginning of their treasure; when it is opened, m a n realizes w h a t is in
it. If there is a n y t h i n g most choice it is the L o r d ' s , or a n y blemish-it
is cast a w a y ! T h e r e is recompense for the one a n d the other is known.
S o m y L o r d said to m e and to A a r o n m y brother, "And I will be with
9 1
your mouth and with his mouth" ( E x . iv. 1 5 ) .
A t the time H e honoured m e a n d revealed m y glory, H e said to
A a r o n and Miriam, "With him I speak mouth to mouth" ( N u m . xii. 8).
F r o m this place y o u r status w i t h y o u r L o r d w a s m a d e well enough
known, O P H I , (namely all this great glory w i t h which y o u w e r e glori
fied."
Greatness belongs to G o d , in whose w o r d s there is nothing b u t w i s
dom. H a p p y the m a n w h o possesses it! O people, learn! O people, under
stand and do not be carried off from acquiring knowledge, for a m a n ' s
life does not consist merely of the length of his d a y s . A m a n ' s life
consists of increasing his knowledge. W o e to a m a n w h o rejoices in d a y s ,
w i t h G o d h a v i n g no place in them! H e is h a p p y in wealth, then it dis
appears and forsakes h i m ; his j o y disappears and he possesses nothing.
9 2
B u t if he s a v e d some of it before he m a d e it vanish, then he is v e r y
h a p p y . H e has learned t h a t wisdom is the beginning of all wealth, t h a t
it magnifies whoever possesses it throughout all the generations of the
world. H e reaches it b y this (position), w h i c h is propriety. W h e t h e r
93
in his life or in his death, his heart abides in the upper a b o d e ,
9 1 9 2 A A
Where PHI is a prominent letter. So below. So D . L. 3 -nan, but L. 3
9 3
Cf. Sermon on the Mount, Matt. vi. 21.
236 Book V I Miscellaneous T e a c h i n g VI. §§.7.8
a n d it brings about m e r c y for him which is like a sea whose rollers are
compassions. T h e w a t e r in it magnifies life. H a p p y the heart that
radiates w i s d o m , whose owner dwells in the G a r d e n under fine trees!
Praise b e to the Illuminator w h o fills the wise w i t h the spirit of
w i s d o m , so t h a t t h e y are like lamps shining in the world and dispelling
the d a r k . If it w e r e not for the wise, the world would not be in wellbe-
ing or crowned w i t h grace. T h o s e w h o possess knowledge are great in
the world, so t h a t their d a y s are blessed and illumining. H o w good were
the d a y s of the Righteous of the w o r l d ! N o evil thing w a s ever wrought
in them. L e t us g i v e thanks to the Powerful One w h o brought into
being for us a holy Scripture, w h o l l y life and blessings and mercies!
§ 8. S A D I A N D M O S E S
9 4 9 5 1 A 9 6
For nrr 813. MSS p ? and so ; 1. -p. Cf. this whole passage with John
9 7 9 8
xii. 46 and Rev. xxi. 23-4. I.e. 'motivated' or 'was responsible for'. Lit 'was
9 9
led'. I.e. the four divisions of the Egyptian army.
VI. §.8 S A D I a n d Moses 237
1 0 0
This seems to refer to QOPH ( = 100, the age of Abraham when Sarah bore Isaac).
1 0 1 1 0 2 A 1 0 3
Because Sadi is the first letter of mx. Or as 'preoccupied'. Joy in the
1 0 4
service of God. Lit. 'expansion' or 'scope'.
238 Book V I Miscellaneous T e a c h i n g VI. §§.8,9
§ 9. Q O P H A N D M O S E S
1 0 5 8
As S.P., with var. -p'ja. i° So 107 i . . QOPH is the first letter of the root
e
1 0 8 1 0 9
Bnp. I.e. the QOPH of noisp. Presumably the QOPH of naup.
VI. §.g Q O P H and Moses 239
est f r o m 3'ou y o u r L o r d a c t e d g l o r i o u s l y a n d b r o u g h t i t a b o u t ; l i k e w i s e
for h i s d e s c e n d a n t s a p r i e s t h o o d w a s m a d e p e r p e t u a l , u n a l t e r a b l e f o r
ever.
1 1 0
I dwelt in the S a n c t u a r y m a g n i f y i n g the c o n g r e g a t i o n . Why was
t h e r e n o m e n t i o n of m e i n t h e f i r s t of t h e s e c t i o n s , s o t h a t I s h o u l d b e
like m y companions which were written a n d b y which all the sections
of t h e l a w w e r e b e g u n ? "
T h e n the great prophet Moses g a v e answer appropriate to these
remarks, an answer that magnifies the hearer. " T o y o u , O Q O P H ,
t h e r e is g r e a t e r t h a n t h a t , f o r y o u m a g n i f i e d A b r a h a m a n d h i s g l o r y
1 1 1 1 1 2
was perfected b y y o u r number t o o . B y you the S a b b a t h came into
being a n d y o u magnified it a n d r e v e a l e d its g l o r y to all the genera
t i o n s . O n t h e d a y w h e n t h e c o n g r e g a t i o n of t h e L o r d w e r e d e l i v e r e d ,
y o u manifested s a l v a t i o n w h i c h magnifies its possessor. I n it Israel
rejoice, unique in holiness."
T h e faithful prophet m a d e a statement w h o l l y r i g h t : " B e a t rest, O
b l e s s e d l e t t e r , for i n y o u r e x i s t e n c e t h e r e is life, b u t i n y o u r c e s s a t i o n
d e s t r u c t i o n . A s l o n g a s y o u l i v e t h e r e i s life, b u t w h e n y o u c e a s e t o l i v e
t h e r e is d e s t r u c t i o n ; (in t h e o n e c a s e ) t h e r e is i n c r e a s e of s a f e t y f o r t h e
c o n g r e g a t i o n , for i t is p r e s e r v e d b y y o u , ( a n d i n t h e o t h e r ) l o s s f o r t h e
c o n g r e g a t i o n , for i t w o u l d b e w i t h o u t y o u . W o e t o a g e n e r a t i o n f r o m
which y o u are w i t h h e l d ! T h e r e w o u l d be no light in it a n d none to
r e p e n t of s i n w o u l d b e f o u n d t h e r e . "
I t arose and replied to him, perchance t h a t generation m i g h t return
to t h e T r u e One, " T h i n g s u n s e e n a n d s e e n b e l o n g t o t h e L o r d . W h e n
H e wills, H e does it. T h i s is a n e v i l - p r o v o k i n g house a n d all w h o are
in it a r e w i c k e d . 0 c o n g r e g a t i o n , k e e p y o u r m i n d a w a y f r o m t h a t h o u s e
a n d d o n o t p a s s o v e r t o it, f o r i t is n o t i n y o u r p o w e r t o a l t e r i t . I f y o u
h a t e it, y o u r g l o r y w i l l b e a b o v e w h a t i t i s , a n d if y o u l o v e i t , i t w i l l b e
a n e n d of y o u . I f y o u s a y , " I w i l l n o t e n t e r i t " , y o u w i l l b e c a l l e d b y
t h e n a m e of t h e L o r d a n d a l l y o u r foes w i l l f e a r y o u . T h e g l o r y of y o u r
f a t h e r s w i l l t h e n l a s t for y o u a n d w h a t t h e y c o v e n a n t e d f o r y o u w i l l
n e v e r b e c h a n g e d for y o u . B e w i d e a w a k e t o w h a t y o u u n d e r s t a n d of
perfect action w h i c h magnifies its owner. 0 people, a w a k e n to this
knowledge a n d learn it w i t h b e l i e v i n g heart! If y o u are devoid, the l a w
will not be g i v e n to y o u a n d y o u will h a v e nothing b u t this deed.
Magnified be the Powerful One w h o did not m a k e y o u to need the
t e a c h i n g of o u t s i d e r s o r t h e w i s d o m of t h e v a i n , b u t g a v e y o u a S c r i p
t u r e c o m p l e t e w i t h life, w h i c h H e w r o t e w i t h H i s o w n f i n g e r , a n d
handed w i t h His right h a n d to a faithful prophet. H e c r o w n e d it w i t h
wonders a n d magnified it w i t h miracles a n d reinforced it w i t h signs.
1 1 0
Because QOPH is in anp». Because he was p (100) when he became the father
1 1 1
1 1 2
of righteous Isaac. So 1. with L - j T a .
240 Book V I Miscellaneous T e a c h i n g VI. §§.9,10
§.io § 10. T A VA N D M O S E S
L o o k a t T A V as it stands speaking w i t h the great prophet Moses,
114
speaking w i t h greatness, " I a m from the beginning. I w a s in G e n e s i s
1 1 5
—the earth was without form and void (Gen. i. 2 ) . T h r o u g h m e the
T r u e One m a d e the elements to g r o w , w h i c h are the foundations of the
Creation. I opened the g a t e of good a n d I w a s w i t h A b r a h a m in great
perfectness. M y L o r d passed m y excellence before Moses a n d revealed
to him e v e r y great wonder a n d did not conceal from him a n y t h i n g of
w h a t H e planned to do, nor of w h a t w a s to take place through m y
number. I w a s a record for him and his descendants a t the completion
of it. T h e hosts of the L o r d w e n t forth a n d sought w h a t I h a d promised
a n d t h e y h a d all glory. W a s I not a seal to w h a t w a s written, in order
to m a g n i f y all t h a t w a s done, so that in m e e v e r y good thing would be
magnified after a time ? W o e to all w h o are found in i t — a time of
overwhelming for all w h o are found in it—of considerable distress!
T h e congregation will be dispersed after following an alien god and
sacrificing to idols a n d provoking their L o r d . T h i s will be calamitous
for them, a time of loss. T h i s is a time in which t h e y provoke G o d with
their abominations, w h e n H i s w r a t h is revealed and H e will slay fathers
a n d m a k e an end of sons a n d forsake w o m e n immersed in uncleanness;
t h e y will build places for evil practices a n d forsake the places of the
1 1 6
T r u e O n e . T h e T r u e One will remove Himself and the d a y s of F a v o u r
will be concealed a n d of D i s f a v o u r revealed. T h e world will be in distress
on account of the manifold blessings t h a t h a v e been removed from it; the
chief of these, righteousness, will be humbled a t the apostasy of its
sons; evildoing will rejoice a t w h a t it perceives there. E v i l d o i n g will
s a y to Righteousness, " W h a t is this loss t h a t has manifested to these
sons w h o resemble the stars of heaven in eminence and abundance,
1 1 8 l 1 1 4 1 1 5 1 1 8
Or = |n D (sign). In rrsnna. TAV in inn. For the thought of this
passage cf. Mark xiii. 14ff. (Matt. xxiv. 19: Luke xxi. 23). The ref. to places for
evil practices being built, etc. recalls Mark xiii. 14 etc. The ref. to women recalls verse 17.
There may be an historical ref. here to sacrilege committed against the Samaritans, e.g.
that by Antiochus IV in the 2nd century B.C. (II Mace. vi. 2).
VI. io T A V a n d Moses 241
§ n. A L A F — H E AND MOSES
1 1 7 1 1 8
For this meaning of 'blessing' cf. Is. lxv. 8 of the vine. Cf. the thought of Jer.
VI. §.ll A L A F — H E a n d Moses 243
1 1 9 1 2 0
I.e. the ALAF of DTI^K, ref. to Gen. i. 1. Ref. to the ALAF of [the word •>3js.
1 2 1 1 2 2
I.e. ALAF is the first letter of both expressions. I.e. BIT is the very first
1 2 3
letter in Scripture. I.e. BIT = 2.
244 Book V I Miscellaneous T e a c h i n g V I . §.n
1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3
I.e. the two tablets. D.TI'PK being 5 letters. HE occurring twice in both rrnx
1 3 1 1 3 5
and mn'. Thefinalletter of ntsn. By the add. of HE to the original names. So
m a s became nmas and n o became m i .
246 Book V I Miscellaneous T e a c h i n g VI. § . n
(PART TWO)
APPENDIX I
Genesis Exodus
i.i IV.2: VI.7 ii.24 11.2
1.2 V.3: VI.10 iii.4 I.i:IV.i2:V. 3
1.8:11.9 xv.8
1.8 XV.IO
1.8 XV. 11
1.8 XV. 12
1.8 xv. 14 11.9
1.8 xv.15 11.9
1.8 xv. 17 111.4
1.8 xv.26
1.8 xvi.6
1.8 xvi.28
1.8 Xvii.2
1.8 xvii.5
1.8 xvii.14
1.8 xix.4
1.9 xix.6
1.9 xix.9
1.9 xix. 18
1.9 xix.20
1-9 xix.22
1.9 XX.2 II.9:IV. :V.5 3
1.10 xxxii.io
1.9 xxxii.12 IV.4,8
I.n xxxii.13 III.4
1.11 xxxii.26 III.i
1.11 xxxii.29 III.4
1.11 xxxiv.28 V.i
II.8 xxxix.43 III.4
II.8
Leviticus
1.11
I . n : IV.8 ix.24 IV.2
I.n:IV.8 xviii.6 III.7
I . n : IV.4 xviii.16 III.7
II.8 xix. 18 III.3.5
II.8 xix.33 III.3.6
II.8 xix.34 IH.3,6
1.11 xx.3 III.7
1 . 1 1 : II.8 xxiii.42 III.3
I . n : I I . 8 , 9 : V.4 xxiv.8 IV.i
254 Appendix I I
APPENDIX III
O.T. PASSAGES QUOTED PARTLY FROM SAM.PENTATEUCH
AND PARTLY FROM SAM.TARGUM
Genesis Deuteronomy
IV.9
IV.10
i.62 IV. 11
12 III.3
•13 IV.9
•39 IV.12
'•9 V.4
APPENDIX IV
6 AOS
X
€EVOS
[Other Greek words occurring in the Liturgy are: uiKpos as 01j?)3: 'pfprcop as
•Htm: apKcov as pmx]